4-163-183-11(1)
Solid-State Memory
Camcorder
PMW-EX1R
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retain it for future reference.
© 2009 Sony Corporation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
For the customers in the USA and Canada
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.
You can help preserve our environment by
returning your used rechargeable batteries to
the collection and recycling location nearest
you.
For more information regarding recycling of
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-
822-8837, or visit
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking
Lithium-Ion batteries.
• EN55103-1 : Electromagnetic
Interference(Emission)
• EN55103-2 : Electromagnetic
Susceptibility(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
For the customers in Taiwan only
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japon.
AVERTISSEMENT
Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie ou
d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution,
garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier
l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel
qualifié.
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la
sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question
concernant le service ou la garantie, veuillez
consulter les adresses indiquées dans les
documents de service ou de garantie
séparés.
AVERTISSEMENT
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil, incorporer
un dispositif de coupure dans le câblage fixe
ou brancher la fiche d’alimentation dans une
prise murale facilement accessible proche de
l’appareil. En cas de problème lors du
fonctionnement de l’appareil, enclencher le
dispositif de coupure d’alimentation ou
débrancher la fiche d’alimentation.
Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au
Canada.
RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX
IONS DE LITHIUM
Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium sont
recyclables.
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver
l’environnement en rapportant les piles
usées dans un point de collection et
recyclage le plus proche.
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des
accumulateurs, téléphonez le numéro gratuit
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada
uniquement), ou visitez http://www.rbrc.org/
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des
accumulateurs aux ions de lithium qui sont
endommagées ou qui fuient..
IMPORTANT
La plaque signalétique se situe sous
l’appareil.
AVERTISSEMENT
Une pression acoustique excessive en
provenance des écouteurs ou du casque
peut provoquer une baisse de l'acuité
auditive.
Pour utiliser ce produit en toute sécurité,
évitez l'écoute prolongée à des pressions
sonores excessives.
Pour les clients au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Pour les clients en Europe
Ce produit portant la marque CE est
conforme à la Directive sur la compatibilité
électromagnétique (EMC) émise par la
Commission de la Communauté
européenne.
La conformité à cette directive implique la
conformité aux normes européennes
suivantes :
• EN55103-1 : Interférences
électromagnétiques (émission)
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique
(immunité)
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les
environnements électromagnétiques
suivants : E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et
industrie légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de
télévision).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und
Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen
Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst
oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in
den separaten Kundendienst- oder
Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten
Anschriften.
WARNUNG
Um die Gefahr von Bränden oder
elektrischen Schlägen zu verringern, darf
dieses Gerät nicht Regen oder
Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden.
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal.
Für Kunden in Deutschland
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur
entladene Batterien in die Sammelboxen
beim Handel oder den Kommunen. Entladen
sind Batterien in der Regel dann, wenn das
Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert „Batterie
leer“ oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer
der Batterien „nicht mehr einwandfrei
funktioniert“. Um sicherzugehen, kleben Sie
die Batteriepole z.B. mit einem Klebestreifen
ab oder geben Sie die Batterien einzeln in
einen Plastikbeutel.
WARNUNG
Beim Einbau des Geräts ist daher im
Festkabel ein leicht zugänglicher
Unterbrecher einzufügen, oder der
Netzstecker muss mit einer in der Nähe des
Geräts befindlichen, leicht zugänglichen
Wandsteckdose verbunden werden. Wenn
während des Betriebs eine Funktionsstörung
auftritt, ist der Unterbrecher zu betätigen
bzw. der Netzstecker abzuziehen, damit die
Stromversorgung zum Gerät unterbrochen
wird.
WICHTIG
Das Namensschild befindet sich auf der
Unterseite des Gerätes.
WARNUNG
Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrhörern und
Kopfhörern kann Gehörschäden
verursachen.
Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden,
vermeiden Sie längeres Hören bei sehr
hohen Schalldruckpegeln.
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-
Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die EMV-
Richtlinie der EG-Kommission.
Angewandte Normen:
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit)
Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen
Umgebungen: E1 (Wohnbereich), E2
(kommerzieller und in beschränktem Maße
industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im
Freien) und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich,
z.B. Fernsehstudio).
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Table of Contents
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Table of Contents
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering the Customized Settings as a Picture
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Playing Back the Selected and Subsequent Clips in
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark to/from a Clip (HD Mode
Displaying the SHOT MARK Screen (HD Mode
Table of Contents
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording the Camcorder Picture on an External
Table of Contents
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Package Configuration
Make sure you have following items supplied with your camcorder.
The number in parentheses indicates the number of that item supplied.
Cold shoe kit (1)
Lens hood with lens cap (1)
The kit comprises an auxiliary shoe, four screws, and
a bottom plate.
BP-U30 battery pack (1)
It is attached to the camcorder at the factory.
If you attach an optional wide-conversion lens,
remove the lens hood.
B
P
-
S
3
0
Large eyecup (1)
Infrared Remote
Commander (1)
BC-U1 battery charger (1)
PUSH SET
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
.
u
>
x
FREV
FFWD
m
M
REC
REC PAUSE
PUSH AF
z
X
It is attached to the
D
C
O
U
T
camcorder at the factory.
C
H
A
R
G
E
0
%
B
A
B
C
8
0
T
T
E
R
1
1
0
-U
Y
0
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
USB cable (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
AV connecting cable (1)
Lithium battery (CR2032 for backup) (1)
It is mounted in the camcorder at the factory.
Lithium battery (CR2025 for the IR Remote
Commander) (1)
Component video cable (1)
It is mounted in the IR Remote Commander at the
factory.
CD-ROM:
Utility Software for Solid-State Memory
Camcorder and Recorder (XDCAM EX Clip
Browsing Software, SxS Device Driver
Software) (1)
Package Configuration
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder
(Operating Instructions in PDF) (1)
Operating Instructions (This manual) (1)
SxS Device Driver Software End-User License
Agreement (1)
Features
The PMW-EX1R is a highly compact and high-
1)
performance XDCAM EX camcorder that uses
1)
SxS memory cards, as its recording medium.
The imaging devices used in the PMW-EX1R
1
camcorder are three / -inch type CMOS sensors,
2
each with an effective pixel count of 1920 × 1080,
which produce images in full HD resolution.
Multiple-format recording
The PMW-EX1R camcorder offers a wide array
of recording formats for multiple content creation
applications. In addition to HD video of 1080 or
720 effective scan lines, the camcorder can also
record and play back in DVCAM-compatible
mode.
Switching between Progressive and Interlace and
between NTSC and PAL are also possible,
permitting you to use various formats for your
needs.
SxS memory cards can simultaneously hold
multiple files of any of these recording formats,
allowing for flexible use of the memory cards.
A New Generation of HD Recording
System
New nonlinear recording media
Using SxS memory cards, the PMW-EX1R offers
nonlinear capabilities such as instant random
access and file-based operation.
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long GOP”
codec
The PMW-EX1R records 1920 × 1080 HD
images using “MPEG-2 Long GOP” codec
compression. This mature “MPEG-2 Long GOP”
1)
codec, which is also adopted in the XDCAM
2)
HD and HDV 1080i series of products, enables
you to record stunning-quality HD video and
audio with long recording time by efficiently
compressing the data.
Selectable bit rates
The PMW-EX1R offers a choice of bit rates:
either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or 25 Mbps (SP
mode), depending on the desired picture quality
and recording time.
Features
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Long recording time
Versatile focus-assistance functions
The lens has a versatile functions for easy and
precise focus adjustments.
• One-push Auto Focus
• MF Assist
• Expanded Focus
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the
PMW-EX1R records high-quality HD images for
long recording time of approx. 100 minutes in HQ
mode (35 Mbps VBR) or approx. 140 minutes in
SP mode (25 Mbps CBR) on a single 32-GB SxS
memory card. Equipped with two SxS memory
card slots, the PMW-EX1R makes transition
seamless without any frame loss, when recording
is done across two cards.
• Peaking
• Optical Image Stabilizer (Steady Shot)
Creative Recording Modes and Settings
High-quality uncompressed audio recording
In addition to HD video recording, the PMW-
EX1R can record and play back high-quality,
two-channel 16-bit, 48-kHz linear PCM
uncompressed audio.
23.98P native recording
The PMW-EX1R camcorder, a new member of
Sony’s legendary CineAlta family, though
compact offers native 23.98P recording
1)
capability.
IT friendly
Slow & Quick Motion function
The file-based recording in MP4 format allows
material to be handled with great flexibility in an
IT-based environment, easily available for
copying, transferring, sharing, and archiving.
The PMW-EX1R offers a Slow & Quick Motion
function, commonly known as overcranking and
undercranking in film shooting, which enables
you to create unique ‘looks’ or special effects of
slow- and fast-motion images.
Instant-access thumbnail display with “Expand”
function
Each time a recording is started and stopped on
the XDCAM EX camcorder, the video and audio
signals are recorded as one clip.
Furthermore, thumbnails are automatically
generated for each clip as a visual reference,
allowing the operator to cue-up to a desired scene
simply by guiding the cursor to a thumbnail. For
further convenience, the ‘Expand’ function
allows one selected clip in the Thumbnail display
to be divided into 12 equal time intervals, each
with its own thumbnail identifier. This is useful if
you wish to quickly search for a particular scene
within a lengthy clip.
Slow Shutter function
The PMW-EX1R offers a Slow Shutter function
for capturing clear images in low-light
environments. This allows the shutter speed to be
changed to a maximum of 64-frame accumulation
period.
Selectable gamma curves
The PMW-EX1R provides various types of
gamma identical to those of other CineAlta
camcorders.
Interval Recording function
The PMW-EX1R offers an Interval Recording
function that intermittently records signals at pre-
determined intervals. This is convenient for
shooting over long periods of time and also when
creating pictures with special effects of extremely
quick motion.
Cutting-edge Camera Technologies
1
1)
/ -inch type three “Exmor” CMOS sensors
2
The PMW-EX1R is equipped with three newly
developed / -inch type “Exmor” CMOS
1
Frame Recording function
2
Frame Recording is a unique feature of the PMW-
EX1R camcorder that is especially useful for
clay-animation shooting. With this function,
images for pre-determined frame are recorded
each time the record button is pressed.
Sensors, which deliver excellent picture
performance with full HD resolution.
14x zoom lens
The PMW-EX1R is equipped with a zoom lens
specifically designed for the camcorder to offer
optimum picture performance. Independent rings
for zoom, focus, and iris adjustment give the user
a high level of operational comfort.
Shutter-angle settings
In addition to the electric shutter speed controls,
the PMW-EX1R also has a “shutter angle”
control, which is familiar to cinematographers.
Features
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture Profile feature
XDCAM EX web sites
The Picture Profile feature allows the camera
operator to easily call up customized picture-
tonal settings to suit particular shooting
conditions.
For information on XDCAM EX, visit the
following web sites:
United States
Shot Transition function
http://www.sony.com/xdcamex
The Shot Transition function allows for smooth
automatic scene transitions. The operator can
program start and end settings for zoom, focus,
and white balance into the A and B buttons, and
with a press of the Start button a smooth transition
will take place according to the set time.
Canada
http://www.sony.ca/xdcamex
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and Russia
http://www.sonybiz.net/xdcamex
Latin America
http://www.sonypro-latin.com/xdcamex
Picture Cache function
The unit can utilize its internal memory to store
the image being captured, allowing recording to
commence a certain time (15 seconds at
maximum) in advance of when the recording
button is pressed.
Australia
www.sony.com.au/xdcamex
Asia (except Korea, China, and Japan)
http://pro.sony-asia.com
Korea
http://bp.sony.co.kr/xdcamex
A variety of functions and designs for
high operability
China
http://pro.sony.com.cn/minisite/XDCAMEX
• Depth-of-field indicator
• Brightness-level display
Japan
• Histogram indicator
http://www.sony.co.jp/XDCAMEX
• 3.5-inch color LCD monitor
• Easy-to-see color viewfinder
• Rotary grip
• Four assignable buttons
• Zoom and recording start/stop operations
enabled both on the handle and the grip
• Long operating time with a battery pack
• Wide array of interfaces, including USB,
1)
3)
i.LINK , and HDMI
• ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
• Built-in ND filter wheel
• Selectable gain
• High-speed picture search: ×4, ×15, ×24
• Freeze Mix function
• Image Inversion function
1)
• IR Remote Commander supplied
1)Sony, XDCAM, XDCAM EX, SxS, i.LINK, Exmor,
CineAlta, and Remote Commander are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
2)HDV is a trademark of Sony Corporation and Victor
Company of Japan, Limited.
3)HDMI, HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other
countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Features
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
Using the Software
2
Select and click on the manual that you
wish to read.
The CD-ROM labelled “Utility Software for
Solid-State Memory Camcorder and Recorder”
contains the following software:
This opens the PDF file.
Memo
The files may not be displayed properly,
depending on the version of Adobe Reader. In
such a case, install the latest version you can
download from the URL mentioned in
“Preparations” above.
SxS Device Driver Software
Driver for using SxS memory cards with a
computer having an ExpressCard slot.
Information on installation of the software is
included in the ReadMe (Japanese, English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese) in
PDF format.
Note
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you
can purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your
Sony service representative.
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
Application program for operating clips recorded
with XDCAM EX-series models on a computer.
Information on installation and operations of the
software is included in the User’s Guide
(Japanese, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Chinese) in PDF format.
System Requirements for Using
the Applications
SxS Device Driver Software
Reading the CD-ROM Manuals
Preparations
Applicable hardware
Computer conforming to ExpressCard/34 or
ExpressCard/54
The following program must be installed on your
computer in order to read the operation manuals
contained on the CD-ROM.
OS
Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or later, Microsoft
Windows Vista, or Mac OS X v10.4.9 or later
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher
For other Operating Systems and support
information on the driver, refer to the following
URL:
Memo
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can
download it from the following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
http://www.adobe.com/
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are
registered trademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
registered in the U.S States and other countries.
To read the documents
Do the following:
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
For the operating requirements, visit the web sites
refer to the User’s Guide contained in the CD-
ROM.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
Using the Software
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Software Installation
Do the following to install the software on the
CD-ROM on your computer:
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
2
Select and click on the software that you
wish to install.
The installer for the software starts up.
Follow the displayed instructions:
For details, refer to the User’s Guide or ReadMe of
the software.
Uninstalling an application program
Windows computer
Choose “Start,” “Control Panel” then “Add or
Remove Programs” and specify the program to be
deleted.
Macintosh computer
Drop the folder of the software (default:
/Application/XDCAM EX Clip Browser) into
Trash.
Using the Software
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Parts Identifications
For functions and usage, see the pages shown in parentheses.
Camcorder
1
2
Operation panel on the
handle (page 20)
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
T
T
E
S
/
L
E
I
D
W
F
L
N
Handle
O
V
L
O
M
F
S
E
S
L
I
A
N
M
U
H
T
U
A
/P
T
X
E
N
Y
A
L
P
/
V
E
R
P
O
T
S
F
V
E
P
O
R
P
C
E
T
/S
R
T
R
A
T
S
Upper operation panel
D
L
O
H
T
H
L
F
F
O
3
6 7
R
A
T
S
H
N
S
IT
R
A
O
T
IO
B
N
L
C
G
H
B
RI
L
D
T
C
D
B
.L
T
C
R
IG
DU /U
-B
H
T
A
IT
TIO
2
O
/
N
.
N
R
S
T
A
T
U
1
S
8
D
IS
A
T
T
B
P
IN
L
A
F
O
Y
B
A
R
S
/C
A
M
4
5
40
IRIS
L
E
N
S
9
IN
F
.
5
O
1
B
R
2
T
D
IS
P
H
IS
T
O
0
3
8
GR
.
A
M
0
2
1
IA
T
F
M
F
D
N
A
O
A
E
N
U
1
M
E
A
T
L
N
D
N
A
U
U
T
O
FIL
A
R
O
4
S
S
O
TER
2
E
IG
M
P
N
A
5
1
M
C
M
A
C
5
RO
3
O
L
E
C
C
8
9
1
N
5.6
A
C
2
T
V
/
U
0
O
3
A
1
8
IN
C
O
D
5 . 8
FF
O
N
1
U
E
E
N
R
E
U
M
T
T
FO
1
A
E
IC
/S
P
P
IL
CUS
L
S
F
&
E
O
Q
S
B
R
Z
E
S
LO
B
C
R
T
A
S
E
LE
P
E
CT
A
K
IN
T
G
IN
H D M I
F
U
M
L
L
AN
T
UA
A
X
L
U
T
O
E
A
U
O
TO
F
F
O
T
U
A
L
L
A
U
N
A
M
IO
G
D
A
1
-
U
IN
CH
A
R
1
-1
H
C
IN
X
W
E
L
M
H
HIT
-
E
I
E
O
T
T
B
D
L
IN
W
10
A
U
L
A
T
M
P
A
E
C
X
U
V
E
DIO
B
A
E
S
L
O
T
N
E
U
A
L
A
M
A
P
U
A
S
T
2
-
C
H
H
-2
C
Lens control block
O
P
E
N
Inside the cover
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
11
Bottom (page 22)
Rear operation panel (page 21)
Side operation panel (page 21)
Card slot block
3. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor
To remove the lens hood
1 Loosen the hood fixing screw, 2 turn the
hood in the direction of the arrow, 3 then pull it
out.
B
D C
L
N
O
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
S
R
T
4. Lens hood
C
H-1
A
2
AU
DI
O
IN
CH
-2
MI
C
LIN
E
MI
C+
48
V
MI
C
LIN
E
If you attach an optional wide-conversion
lens, remove the lens hood. (See the column
at right.)
MIC
+4
8V
S
T
O
S
T
A
R
T
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
A
N
E
X
O
C
P
U
S
D
E
D
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
7. Rear IR remote control receptor
1
3
Hood fixing screw
8. COMPONENT OUT connector (Mini D)
To reattach the hood, align the marks on the
hood with those on the camcorder, turn it in the
opposite direction from that when you removed it,
then tighten the fixing screw.
9. A/V OUT connector (audio/video multi
output) (page 135)
Parts Identifications
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
7
3
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
4
5
6
7
l
s
12
P
R
j
H
E
F
O
V
R
E
L
D
V
T
A
T
R
S
G
H
U
T
R
T
P
/
E
O
L A
M
S
P
S
/
T
C
L
Y / P
N
A
O
N
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
S
E
T
J
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
S
/
O
F
E
L
F
T
T
I
H
W
O
R
D
V
/D
D
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
13
14
15
M
A
C
/
S
R
A
B
O
F
Y
N
I
A
T
L
T
A
D
P
S
I
B
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
/
O
I
T
N
N
T
I
A
O
B
-
R
T
H
G
U
/
U
I
C
D
L .
T
T
B
H
D
C
G
I
D
R
L
C
B
L
B
O
I
T
I
H
S
T
N
A
O
R
T
S
C
A
H-1
A
U
D
IO
IN
COMPONENT
OUT
C
H
-2
A/V OUT
M
IC
L
IN
R
E
E
8
L
E
A
S
M
IC
E
+
4
8
M
V
IC
L
IN
E
HDMI OUT
M
IC
+
4
8
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
R
E
V
E
I
W
E
C
F
A
N
D
O
E
X
C
U
P
B
R
A
L
S
D
T
T
E
E
R
Y
E
E
A
S
E
9
Controls on the grip
SD
I
O
U
T
10
Cover of the lens
control block (See
“Note” below.)
I R
I S
A
U
T
O
O
N
E
P
U
S
H
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
16
17
18
ASSIGN
4
11
Grip (page 32)
1. Rear accessory shoe
12. Front accessory shoe
14. Front IR remote control receptor
The supplied cold shoe kit can be attached
15. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors (XLR)
and input selection switches (page 64)
16. WHT BAL (automatic white balance
adjustment) button (page 47)
6. i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (4-pin, S400
conforming to IEEE1394) (page 138)
7. Hooks for the shoulder strap (left and
right)
Note
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown
The lens is properly adjusted at the factory. Do
below.
not touch the controls of the lens control block.
4
3
2
1
Parts Identifications
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation panel on the handle
Upper operation panel
1
2
3
4
5
L
R
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
MONITOR
VOL
BRIGHT DURATION
STATUS
1
2
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
9
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
LCD B.LIGHT
ON OFF
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD
10
11
3
4
j
PREV
l
G
/S
J
6
7
STOP
NEXT
L
s
5
6
12
1. SHOT TRANSITION operation block
REC
START/STOP
T
13
14
2. LCD B.LIGHT (LCD backlight) switch
7
W
HOLD
3. LCD BRIGHT +/– (LCD brightness
adjustment) buttons (page 30)
H
L
OFF
8
4. TC/U-BIT/DURATION (time data
7. BARS/CAM (color bar/camera signal
switching) button (page 67)
Lens control block
1
2
3
AF/MF
Full MF
IRIS
4
5
6
10. SEL/SET (selection/set) button (Joystick)
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
It functions accordingly when you move it up
(toward the subject), down (toward the
viewfinder), left, or right, or you push along
the axis.
OFF ON
FOCUS
E
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
It is called “the joystick” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
7
Parts Identifications
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. PUSH AF (momentary auto focus) button
2. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)
button (page 36)
Side operation panel
Rear operation panel
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
2
ASSIGN
1
2
3
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
ND
FILTER
OFF
2
1
MENU
CANCEL CAMERA
MEDIA
DC IN
S&Q
3
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
SEL/SET
PICTURE
PROFILE
1
4
5
6
AUTO
MANUAL
INTMIC
EXT
CH-1
CH-1
OFF
GAIN
WHITE BAL
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
LEVEL
L
M
H
B
A
AUTO
MANUAL
INTMIC
EXT
PRST
CH-2
CH-2
PMW-EX1R
CACHE REC
7
8
9
10 11
2. MENU (menu display ON/OFF) button
3. SEL/SET (selection/set) dial (Jog dial)
It functions accordingly when you turn it up
or down, or you push it horizontally.
It is called “the jog dial” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
6. WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch (page 47)
Card slot block
The SxS memory card slots and EJECT buttons
are located behind the cover.
1
9. AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 /CH-2 controls
SLOT SELECT
A
B
2
3
10. AUDIO SELECT (audio level control
CH-1
mode selection) switches (page 64)
AUDIO
LEVEL
11. AUDIO IN (audio input selection)
CH-2
switches (page 64)
OPEN
4
Parts Identifications
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls on the grip
IR Remote Commander (Supplied)
The buttons without remarks can be used in the
same manner as the corresponding buttons on the
camcorder.
1
2
M
IC
L
IN
R
E
E
L
E
A
S
M
IC
E
+
4
S T
O P
T /
S T
A R
R
E
V
I
E
R
W
E
C
E X P
F O C U
A N
D E D
S
3
4
1
2
5
6
PUSH SET
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
I
U
E
R
I
S
A
9
T
O
O
N
P
U
S
H
3
4
5
6
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
10
11
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
.
u
>
x
FREV
FFWD
LENS
REMOTE
m
M
REC
REC PAUSE
PUSH AF
7
12
13
z
X
7
8
1. ZOOM T/W (telephoto/wide-angle)
button
3. THUMBNAIL button
4. PREV (previous clip jump) button
5. F REV (fast reverse) button
6. PLAY/PAUSE button
Bottom
7. REC (record) buttons
FOCUS
Press the z button together with the unmarked
button (safety button) to start recording.
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
8. REC PAUSE buttons
Press the X button together with the unmarked
button (safety button) to pause recording.
O V S E R
A L
Z O O M
M A N U
9. PUSH SET button (four-way arrow key)
It functions the same as the SEL/SET button
(joystick) on the camcorder.
10. NEXT button
1
2
3
11. STOP button
12. F FWD (fast forward) button
13. PUSH AF button
2. Tripod receptacles
Note
Note
Check that the size of the hole matches the
screw of the tripod. If they do not match, the
camcorder cannot be attached to the tripod
securely.
The SUB CLIP button does not function with this
camcorder.
When you use the remote commander, see “Using the
Parts Identifications
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Indications
Indications in Camera Mode
When this unit is in Camera mode (mode for
recording), pressing the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button displays the statuses and settings of this
unit on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button again, these indications are canceled.
The recording status indication, such as “zREC,”
is always displayed, regardless of operation of the
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
Remarks
[M]: The indication of the items named with this
suffix can be independently turned on/off
with “Display On/Off” of the LCD/VF SET
[A]: The indication of items named with this suf-
fix can be turned on/off using the assignable
buttons to which the corresponding on/off
[D]: The settings of the items named with this suf-
fix can be changed using the Direct menu on
1
2
3
4
5
120min STBY
A: 25min
B: 50min
Z99
S&Q REC
TCG 00:00:00:00
24
23
HQ
1920/24P
6
7
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
22
21
20
19
74%
High Light ND2
W
hite Fader
8
9
10
TLCS
.
18
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
oo
m
MF
++
ATW 4300K PP
O
FF ND
1
CH2
11
12 13 14 15
16
17
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
S&Q STBY
Standby for Slow & Quick
Motion recording
zINT REC
Interval Recording in progress
Standby for Interval
Recording
Only when an external device is connected to
the i.LINK connector, the status of the device is
displayed.
INT STBY
zFRM REC
FRM STBY
zCACHE
Frame Recording in progress
Standby for Frame Recording
3. Special recording/operation status
indication
z in green: Standby for
Cache Recording
zREC
Recording in progress
Standby for recording
Slow & Quick Motion
recording in progress
z in red: Cache Recording in
progress
STBY
zS&Q REC
On-Screen Indications
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Media status indication
Direct Menu Operation
Memory card in slot A is active.
The settings of the items named with a suffix [D]
can be changed using the Direct menu on the
screen.
Memory card in slot B is active.
Select “All,” “Part,” or “Off” for Direct Menu
menu.
When the Direct mode is set to “Part,” the
operation is limited depending on the GAIN,
SHUTTER, or WHITE BAL switch setting.
When the Direct mode is set to “All,” the GAIN,
SHUTTER, and WHITE BAL switches are
disabled.
Backlight mode
Standard mode
S
Spotlight mode
Note
When the indicator of the FULL AUTO button is
lit, the Direct Menu operation is disabled for the
functions that are forcibly set to the automatic
10. Focus mode indication [M] ([D] only in MF
mode) (page 57)
11. White balance mode and color
To operate the Direct menu
Use the joystick on the handle or the jog dial on
the rear control panel.
Joystick
Jog dial
16. Shutter mode/shutter speed indication
[M][D] (page 52)
L
R
18. Histogram indication [M][A]
MONITOR
VOL
MENU
CANCEL
S&Q
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
SEL/SET
20. Video level cautioning indication [M]
If the video level is too high or too low, a caution
is generated showing the appropriate ND filter
number.
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
SE
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
/
H
P
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
21. Depth-of-Field indication [M][A]
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
0
4
/CA
M
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
.9
FO
5
1
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
22. Brightness level indication [M][A]
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
T
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
PR
P
S&
L/SE
FILE
B
Q
SE
O
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
T
AU
EX
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
EX1R
L
M
H
HIT
-
E
IO
INT
BA
D
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
PMW
DIO
LE
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
23. Special recording mode indication [M] ([D]
PA
NU
ST
A
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
only in Slow & Quick Motion Standby)
Frame Rec
Frame Rec mode
Interval Rec
Interval Rec mode
S&Q Motion
xx/xx fps
Slow & Quick Motion mode
1
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
If “Direct Menu” is set to “All” or “Part,” the
cursor is displayed on one of the items for
which the Direct menu operation is
permitted.
On-Screen Indications
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example: TLCS mode indication
TLCS
7
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
∗
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
2
Tilt the joystick or rotate the jog dial to
set the cursor to the item to be operated
then press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Direct menu of the selected items
appears.
Example:
Direct menu for TLCS mode selection
TLCS
TLCS
TLCS
74%
7
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
M
F
∗
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/200
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
3
Tilt the joystick or rotate the jog dial to
select the setting then press the joystick
or the jog dial.
The menu disappears, and the new setting is
displayed.
On-Screen Indications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Preparations
Power Supply
You can use a battery pack or AC power via an
AC adaptor.
Mounting the battery pack
Fully insert the battery pack then slide it to the left
to lock.
If you connect an AC power source, it has a
priority even if a battery pack is mounted.
T
R
A
N
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptor listed below:
• BP-U30/U60 Lithium-ion Battery Pack
• BC-U1/U2 Battery Charger (usable as an AC
adaptor)
O
S
T
S
N
T
I
H
I O
O
N
B
O
F
C
L
F
D
B
. L
I G
B
A
H
T
T
T
T
D
I
N
I
S
F
L
P
O
A
Y
B
A
R
B
R
S
/ C
I G
C
D
L
R
A
H
M
D
C
U
/ U
R
T
A
T
I T
I O
/
- B
N
S
T
A
T
U
S
V
OFF
MEDIA
/D
V
D
H
CAMERA
M
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
M
O
F
E
R
F
M
A
S
E
L
E
/S
D
IA
E
T
C
H
-1
A
M
U
A
T
O
P
P
IC
T
U
N
R
U
A
R
E
E
L
O
T
N
A
IN
E
F
E
N
O
U
L
IL
T
T
D
D
P
M
T
IO
T
C
S
O
U
Power switch: OFF
E
IN
C
O
X
E
OUT
C
A
U
IN
C
D
CMPOENT
H
IO
-2
A
U
T
U
T
O
O
/V
A
M
A
N
U
A/V
A
L
IN
OUT
T
T
E
X
P
M
T
U
O
W
I
M
-E
D
H
X
1
R
HMDI
Using a Battery Pack
Y
ER
TT
BA
RE
E
AS
LE
T
U
O
I
D
S
Mount a BP-U30 or BP-U60 Lithium-ion battery
pack.
One BP-U30 is supplied with this camcorder.
Battery pack
receptacle
Battery pack
WARNING
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Note
If a battery pack that cannot be used with this
camcorder is mounted, an error message is
appears on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
AVERTISSEMENT
N’exposez pas les batteries à une chaleur
Replace the battery pack with the BP-U30 or BP-
U60, or connect a power to the DC IN connector
after removing the battery pack.
excessive, au soleil ou près d’un feu par exemple.
WARNUNG
Akkus dürfen keinesfalls übermäßiger
Wärmeeinwirkung ausgesetzt werden, wie z.B.
Sonneneinstrahlung, Feuer o. ä.
Removing the battery pack
Hold the BATTERY RELEASE button pressed,
slide the battery pack to the right to unlock, then
pull it out.
Notes
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the
supplied BC-U1/U2 Battery Charger.
• A warm battery pack immediately after use may
not be able to be fully recharged.
T
R
A
N
O
S
T
S
N
T
I
H
O
I
O
N
B
O
F
C
L
F
D
B
L .
B
G
I
A
H
T
T
T
D
I
N
I
S
F
L
P
O
A
Y
B
A
R
B
S
R
/ C
G
I
D
L
R
A
H
C
M
T
D
C
U
R
T
A
T
I T
/ U
O
I
/
N
B -
S
T
A
T
U
S
V
OFF
MEDIA
/D
V
D
H
CAMERA
M
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
M
O
F
E
R
F
M
A
S
E
L
E
/S
D
IA
E
T
C
H
-
1
A
M
U
A
T
N
O
U
P
P
IC
O
T
U
IL
R
A
R
E
E
L
T
N
A
IN
E
F
E
N
O
U
L
T
T
D
D
P
M
T
IO
T
C
S
O
C
U
O
E
IN
Power switch: OFF
X
E
OUT
C
A
U
IN
C
D
CMPOENT
H
IO
-2
A
U
T
U
T
N
O
O
/V
A
M
A
U
A/V
A
L
IN
OUT
T
E
X
T
PMW
-EX1R
T
U
O
I
M
D
H
HMDI
Y
ER
TT
BA
RE
E
AS
LE
T
U
O
I
D
S
BATTERY
RELEASE
BATTERY
RELEASE
button
Power Supply
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking battery charge remaining
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
To check during operation
STATUS
BRIGHT DURATION
A
B
When recording or playback is in progress on the
battery pack, an icon to show the current battery
charge level and usage time remaining are
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
SHOT
TRANSITION
LCD B.LIGHT
ON
OFF
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
120min
A: 25min
S&Q REC
T
H
L
F
F
O
B: 50min
Z99
A
TR SH
AN OT
SI
TI
B
ON
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
.9
FO
5
1
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
IA
T
M
FF
N
AN
O
A
ED
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
M
5
1
MA
CA
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
10
5
AN
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
I
FOCUS
1
A
ICT
PR
E
/S
P
IL
S&
E
L
F
B
Q
S
O
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
S
E
A
LE
D
PE
AK
IN
CT
G
IN
T
XT
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
L
E
AUT
O
FF
TO
O
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
U
N
H
H-1
A
-1
C
IN
Icon
Remaining
L
M
H
WH
IT
-EX1R
PMW
E
IO
IN
E
T
X
BA
D
L
A
SE
U
T
T
AU
C
DIO
LE
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
100% to 91%
90% to 71%
70% to 51%
50% to 31%
30% to 11%
10% to 0%
BATTERY I NFO
50
0
%
%
100%
Re
m
aining Ti
m
e
:
20min
The camcorder indicates the remaining usage
time in minutes by calculating the available time
with the battery pack if operation is continued at
the current rate of power consumption.
If the battery charge remaining becomes
low
If the battery charge remaining decreases to a
certain level during operation (Low BATT
status), a low-battery message, flashing of the
tally lamps, and a beep sound will warn you.
If the remaining further decreases to a level at
which operation cannot be continued (BATT
Empty status), a battery-empty message appears.
Temporarily set the power switch to OFF and
connect a power source via the DC IN connector
or replace the battery pack with one that is fully
charged.
Note
The operating time on a battery pack depends on
the condition (new or old) of the battery pack and
the ambient temperature.
To check in power-off status
Information on the mounted battery pack
(BATTERY INFO) is displayed on the LCD
monitor screen when you hold the DISPLAY/
BATT INFO button pressed even if the
camcorder is off.
To change the message levels
The BATTERY INFO display goes off after 5
seconds.
The Low BATT level is set to 10% of full charge,
and the BATT Empty level is set to 3% of full
charge at the factory. These settings can be
OTHERS menu.
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
You can connect an AC power source to this
camcorder by using the supplied BC-U1 or an
optional BC-U2 Battery Charger for BP-U30/
U60 as an AC adaptor, as shown below:
Power Supply
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Power On
Connection example: BC-U1
T
R
A
N
O
S
T
S
H
N
T
I
O
I
O
N
B
O
F
L
F
C
This camcorder has Camera mode for recording
and Media mode for playback.
D
B
. L
B
A
G
I
H
T
T
T
D
I
S
I
N
Y
P
F
L
O
A
B
A
R
B
R
S
/ C
G
I
D
L
R
A
H
C
M
T
D
C
U
R
T
A
T
T
U
/
O
I
/
N
B -
I
S
T
A
T
U
S
V
/D
V
D
H
M
The mode is selected when you turn the power on.
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
M
O
E
F
F
M
R
A
S
E
L
E
/S
D
IA
E
T
C
H
-1
A
M
Power switch
U
A
T
N
O
U
P
P
IC
O
T
U
IL
R
A
R
E
E
L
T
N
A
IN
E
F
E
N
O
U
L
T
T
D
D
P
M
T
IO
T
C
S
O
U
E
IN
C
O
X
E
OUT
C
A
U
IN
C
D
CMPOENT
H
IO
-
2
A
U
T
U
T
N
O
O
/V
A
M
A
U
A/V
A
L
I
OUT
T
OFF
MEDIA
PM
T
U
CAMERA
I
O
W
M
D
H
-E
X1R
HDMI
L
M
O
N
VO IT
L
O
THUM
R
N
AIL
R
SE
L/S
F
RE
ET
V
CA
P
NCE
LA
Y
/P
L
AU
SE
F
F
W
Y
PREV
/
ER
D
TT
BA
RE
S
TO
P
E
1
LE
AS
NEXT
T
S
TA
RE
C
R
T/ST
O
P
H
O
L
FF
HOLD
T
U
O
I
D
S
-2
CH
IN
O
DI
A
U
-1
CH
C
8V
MI
4
C+
MI
E
LIN
C
48V
MI
+
C
MI
E
LIN
R
T
A
O
S
T
N
A
N
T
I
O
I
O
H
S
N
B
O
L
F F
D C
B
I G L .
I N T T A B
A
I
D
T
H
T
F
L
P S
O
A B
S
R
Y
R
B
/ C
G
I
L
R
M
A
H
C
D
R U D
B -
C
T
T
A
T
I
U
/
N
O
I
/
S
T
A
T
S
U
R
V
E
I
C
W
V
R
E
/D
E
D
V
XP
H
A
C
E
N
D
S
E
F
D
O
U
M
E
N
U
2
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
O
F
M
E
F
M
S
S
R
T
T
A
A
O
S
R
E
T
P
L/
E
/
S
DI
IN
E
A
T
C
H
H
-1
A
M
U
TO
P
P
IC
AN
T
U
UA
R
R
E
E
L
O
A
IN
EX
T
F
IL
U
T
D
D
C
IO
LE
ENT
MPON
OUT
S
E
R
EL
C
O
CO
T
E
A
A
U
IN
C
D
C
S
E
IO
-2
A
U
TO
M
AN
UA
A
A/V OUT
L
I
N
OUT
T
T
EX
P
T
HDMI OU
M
W
-E
X
1
R
HMDI
Y
BA
T
TER
E
EAS
REL
3
D
C
O
U
T
T
U
O
I
SD
C
H
A
R
G
E
0
%
B
A
B
C
8
0
T
T
E
1
R
Y
1
0
-U
0
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
BC-U1
Press the center green button to unlock the power
switch and move it from the OFF position to the
CAMERA or MEDIA side.
To operate in Camera mode, turn the power on by
setting the power switch to the CAMERA
position.
1
2
Connect the DC power output cable of
the BC-U1/U2 to the DC IN connector
of the camcorder.
To operate in Media mode, turn the power on by
setting the power switch to the MEDIA position.
Connect the power cord supplied with
the BC-U1/U2 to the AC input
connector of the BC-U1/U2 then to an
AC power source.
Turning Power Off
3
Set the mode switch of the BC-U1/U2 to
the DC OUT position.
Set the power switch to the OFF position.
(It is not necessary to press the center button
when returning the switch to the OFF position
from the CAMERA or MEDIA side.)
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of the
BC-U1/U2.
Notes
When recording or playback is in progress on
power from the DC IN connector, the input
voltage is displayed on the LCD monitor/
viewfinder screen.
• This camcorder uses a little standby power even
when the power switch is set to OFF. Remove
the battery pack if the camcorder will not be
used for a prolonged period.
• When removing the battery pack or the DC IN
power, be sure to set the switch to OFF in
advance.
Removing the battery pack and the DC IN
power without first setting the power switch to
OFF may cause damage to the camcorder or
SxS memory cards.
DC
-
IN 12.0V
S&Q REC
A: 25min
B: 50min
Z99
Note
The battery pack mounted on the camcorder is not
charged even if you set the mode switch of the
BC-U1/U2 to the CHARGE position. To charge
the battery pack, remove it from the camcorder
and mount it on the BC-U1/U2.
Power Supply
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INITIAL SETT
Ti one: UTC +09:00 TOKYO
ate / Ti e: 2009/01/01 00:00:00 SET
Fi nish
I
NG
Setting the Clock
me
Z
D
m
When you turn the camcorder on for the first time
after purchasing or replacing the backup battery
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
Set the date and time of the built-in clock, using
this display.
2
3
4
Tilt the joystick or turn the jog dial to
set the year then press the joystick or
dial.
The cursor moves to the month-setting
column.
Set the month, day, hour, minute, and
second in sequence in the same manner.
INITIAL SETT
Ti one: UTC +09:00 TOKYO
ate / Ti e: 2009/01/01 00:00:00
Fi nish
I
NG
me
Z
When you press the joystick or jog dial at
“SET,” the cursor moves back to “Date/
Time.”
D
m
Time Zone
Move the cursor to “Finish” then press
the joystick or dial.
The value shows the time difference from UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time).
Change the setting if needed.
The Initial Setting display disappears, and the
clock setting is completed.
The camcorder enters the operation mode
(Camera mode or Media mode) you selected with
the power switch.
Setting the time and date
Use the joystick on the handle or jog dial on the
rear operation panel for setting.
Once after the Initial Setting display disappears,
the time zone and date/time settings can be
Joystick
Jog dial
L
R
MONITOR
VOL
MENU
CANCEL
S&Q
Notes
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
SEL/SET
• If the clock setting is cleared because of
exhaustion of the backup battery while no
operation power was being supplied (no battery
pack and no DC IN connection), the Initial
Setting display will be displayed when you turn
the camcorder on at the next opportunity.
• While the Initial Setting display is shown, no
other operation except turning the power off is
permitted until you finish the setting for this
display.
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
S
D
N
O
W
F
L
O
V
L
/
M
E
F
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
E
N
1
N
R
FIL
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/S
P
S&
E
L
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
XT
L
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
IN
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
W
EX1R
-
L
M
H
HIT
E
IO
E
INT
BA
D
L
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
PMW
DIO
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
1
Tilt the joystick or turn the jog dial to
set the cursor to “Date/Time” then
press the joystick or dial.
The cursor moves to the year-setting column.
Setting the Clock
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
E
P
O
R
P
C
E
T
/S
R
T
R
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
180°
T
Adjusting the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
H
L
F
O
90°
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
You can adjust the angle and the display
conditions of the LCD monitor for the best view
in various shooting situations.
Adjusting the backlight
These adjustments of the LCD monitor have no
effect on pictures being recorded.
LCD BRIGHT +/– buttons
LCD B.LIGHT switch
Turning on/off the LCD monitor
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
STATUS
BRIGHT DURATION
The LCD monitor turns on when it is opened and
turns off when it is returned to the park position.
To open, pull the monitor out horizontally from
the park position to rotate it 90 degrees.
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
LCD B.LIGHT
ON
OFF
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
E
N
U
/
H
P
T
V
S
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
E
V
P
O
E
P
O
T
S
R
C
R
P
C
P
E
T
/S
/
T
R
R
E
R
T
T
A
S
R
A
D
L
T
O
S
H
T
D
L
O
H
T
H
L
F
F
O
H
L
F
O
A
TR SH
AN OT
SI
TI
B
ON
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
0
4
/CA
M
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
0
2
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
F
IL
A
SS
R
O
O
4
2
E
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
10
5
AN
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
E
/S
P
IL
S&
L
F
B
Q
SE
RO
M
2
ZE
G
B
S
L
C
R
OT
SE
.
A
LE
D
PE
AK
IN
CT
1
G
IN
T
XT
8
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
U
E
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
AL
U
N
A
M
ft
DIO
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
40
mm
L
M
H
WH
IT
-EX1R
PMW
E
IO
IN
E
T
X
BA
D
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
IRIS
L
E
DIO
LE
B
N
S
LE
O
VE
T
9
.
IN
A
L
A
U
5
ST
A
NU
F
O
PA
1
B
R
M
2
T
-2
CH
H
-2
C
0
8
O
P
.
EN
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Adjusting the angle
Turning the backlight on/off
Rotate the opened LCD monitor to the desired
angle.
The backlight may not be necessary for viewing
images on the LCD monitor under bright ambient
light, such as in an outdoor location. Set the LCD
B.LIGHT switch to OFF to turn off the backlight.
S
V
E
R
P
P
O
C
R
T
/S
E
R
T
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
T
H
L
F
O
Adjusting the brightness of the backlight
When you set the LCD B.LIGHT switch to ON,
you can adjust the brightness of the backlight,
using the LCD BRIGHT + and – buttons.
Press the – button to darken the backlight. Press
the + button to make it brighter.
2
.
1
8
t
40
mm
IRIS
L
E
N
S
9
IN
F
.
5
O
1
B
R
2
T
0
8
.
It can be rotated as much as 90 degrees in the
direction facing the subject and as much as 180
degrees in the opposite direction.
During adjustment, the backlight level bar
appears to indicate the adjustment value.
When you rotate it 90 degrees toward the subject,
the image on the monitor becomes upside down,
indicating the mirror image of the subject. The
display direction of the textual information is
converted to the readable direction.
Adjusting the color, contrast, and
brightness
These adjustments can be made using the LCD/
VF SET menu.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode and select
(LCD/VF SET
menu) then “LCD” from the menu.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD/VF SET
B
B
B
B
B
B
Eyepiece focusing knob
LCD
EVF
Peaking
C
C
olor
ont rast
:
:
0
0
0
Brightness:
00:00
Marker
Zebra
Display
On/Of f
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
Set color, contrast and brightness of the LCD
monitor with the corresponding LCD menu
items: Color, Contrast, and Brightness
H
L
F
F
O
A
T
S
RA HO
NS
T
IO
IT
B
N
B
LC
RIG
LC
D
HT
D
B.
TC
LIG
D
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
TT LA
IN
Y
F
O
B
A
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
N
AN
O
ED
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
R
U
AU
TO
A
N
O
4
F
ILTE
2
A
SSI
ER
O
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
P
GN
AM
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
10
5
AN
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
M
T
TU
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
P
S&
E
L/SE
FILE
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
XT
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
U
TO
E
AU
O
FF
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
A
-1
CH
IN
W
EX1R
-
L
M
H
HIT
E
INT
E
BA
DIO
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
X
PMW
DIO
EC
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Adjusting the Viewfinder
If the picture on the LCD monitor is hard to view
under bright ambient light, you can use the
viewfinder to check the picture.
You can adjust the display conditions of the
viewfinder according to your current lighting
conditions.
Adjusting the backlight
The brightness of the backlight for the EVF can
be switched between High and Low.
Select “EVF” from the LCD/VF SET menu and
set “Backlight.”
These adjustments of the viewfinder have no
effect on pictures being recorded.
LCD/VF SET
B
LCD
EVF
Peaking
Backl i ght : High
ode : Color
ont rast
Br ightness :
er
Caution
B
B
B
B
B
M
C
:
0
0
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece of
the viewfinder facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder, and cause fire.
00:00
Marker
Zebra
Display
Po
w
: Auto
On/Of f
Hereafter the viewfinder is referred to as “EVF”
(abbreviation of Electronic Viewfinder).
Switching between color and
monochrome modes
For the EVF screen, color or monochrome display
can be selected.
Select “EVF” from the LCD/VF SET menu then
select “Mode.”
Select “B&W” if checking the subject and
focusing are easier on the monochrome display.
If you assign “EVF Mode” to one of the
between color and monochrome by pressing the
button.
Turning the EVF on/off
With the factory setting, the EVF is turned on
when the LCD monitor is in its park position or is
rotated to face the subject.
You can change the setting so that the EVF is
always on regardless of the status of the LCD
SET menu. Change the “Power” setting from
“Auto” to “On.”
Adjusting the focus in the viewfinder
Adjusting the contrast and brightness
The eyepiece focusing (diopter compensation)
knob enables adjustment to match the eyesight of
operator so that the operator can view the image
clearly in the eyepiece.
Select “EVF” from the LCD/VF SET menu and
adjust the contrast and brightness with the
corresponding items: Contrast and Brightness
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the eyecup (supplied)
Adjusting the Grip
A large eyecup is attached to the EVF at the
factory. It can be removed by pulling it out, if not
necessary.
To reattach the eyecup, stretch it a little to attach
to the EVF and fit the rim of the eyecup into the
horizontal groove of the viewfinder.
The grip rotates approx. 120 degrees to support a
variety of shooting styles.
Holding the RELEASE button pressed, slowly
rotate the grip.
-1
H
C
IC
V
48
M
+
IC
M
R
R
E
C
E
E
N
LI
V
IE
V
48
W
EX
P
O
IC
M
+
IC
A
N
M
F
DE
D
C
E
U
N
LI
S
S
T
A
S
R
T
T
O
R
E
/
P
L
E
A
S
E
T
A
R
A
N
O
S
S
H
O T
N
I T
I O
N
B
O
F
C
L
F
D
B .
L
B
S
I
H
G
I
A
T
T
T
D
I
N
Y
P
F
L
O
A
B
A
B
R
R
S
C
/
I G
C
D
L
H
T
D
U
R
B -
T
A
T
C
/ U
I O
/
N
I T
S
T
A
T
U
S
R
V
E
IE
C
W
R
E
E
X
P
A
C
N
U
D
S
E
F
D
O
S
S
T
T
A
O
R
Eyecup
T
P
/
T
N
E
N
O
P
M
O
U
C
O
T
R
E
L
E
T
A
S
U
O
/V
E
A
T
U
O
I
M
D
H
Grip
RY
TE
EA
SE
SDI OUT
RELEASE
RELEASE button
Click positions are provided at each 15 degrees.
Release the RELEASE button at the desired click
position to lock the grip.
Adjusting the Grip
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
To avoid malfunctions, the remote control
function is automatically deactivated when the
camcorder is turned off. Activate the function
each time when required after you turn the
camcorder on.
Using the IR Remote
Commander
Before use
Battery lifetime
Before you use the supplied IR Remote
Commander for the first time, pull out the
insulation sheet from the battery holder.
When the lithium battery’s power falls, the IR
Remote Commander may not work even if you
press the buttons. The average lithium battery’s
service life is about one year, but this depends on
the pattern of use.
If pressing the remote control buttons produces
absolutely no effect on the camcorder, replace the
battery then check the operation again.
Insulation sheet
Replacing the battery in the IR Remote
Commander
A CR2025 lithium battery is set in the holder at
the factory.
Use a commercially available CR2025 lithium
battery. Do not use any battery other than a
CR2025.
To use the IR Remote Commander
For controlling the camcorder from the IR
Remote Commander, activate the remote control
function of the camcorder after turning the power
on.
Activating/deactivating the remote control
function can be achieved using the Setup menu or
an assignable button.
1
Hold down the lock lever 1, pull out
the battery holder 2, and remove the
battery.
To activate using the menu
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, select
and set “IR Remote” to “On.”
(the OTHERS menu)
2
1
2
Place a new battery in the battery
holder with the + symbol facing upward
1, then push the battery holder into the
IR Remote Commander until it clicks
2.
O
C
THERS
lock Set
B
Language
Assign Bu tton
Tal l y
:
Engl i sh
B
B
B
00:00
H
ours
IR
Bat tery Alar
M
eter
O
n
Remote
:
B
Of f
m
With the + symbol upward
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
To activate using an assignable button
Assigning “IR Remote” to one of the assignable
buttons permits you to activate/deactivate the
remote control function by pressing the button.
2
For the assignable buttons, see“Changing Functions
Using the IR Remote Commander
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Handling SxS Memory
Cards
• Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in
fire.
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
This camcorder records audio and video on SxS
memory cards (optional) inserted in the card slots.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
About SxS Memory Cards
Usable SxS memory cards
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
Use the following Sony-made SxS memory cards
(SxS PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
Operations are not guaranteed with memory cards
other than SxS PRO and SxS-1.
AVERTISSEMENT
N’exposez pas les batteries à une chaleur
excessive, au soleil ou près d’un feu par exemple.
SxS PRO
• SBP-8 (8GB)
• SBP-16 (16GB)
• SBP-32 (32GB)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement
avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Lorsque vous mettez la batterie au rebut, vous
devez respecter la législation en vigueur dans le
pays ou la région où vous vous trouvez.
SxS-1
• SBS-32G1 (32GB)
These cards comply with the ExpressCard
standard.
• SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned by
Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association (PCMCIA) and are licensed to Sony
Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
WARNUNG
Akkus dürfen keinesfalls übermäßiger
Wärmeeinwirkung ausgesetzt werden, wie z.B.
Sonneneinstrahlung, Feuer o. ä.
VORSICHT
Notes on using SxS memory cards
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher
Batterien. Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller
empfohlenen oder einen gleichwertigen Typ
ersetzen.
Wenn Sie die Batterie entsorgen, müssen Sie die
Gesetze der jeweiligen Region und des jeweiligen
Landes befolgen.
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost in the
following situations:
—If you remove this media or turn off the
power while formatting, reading or writing
data.
—If you use this media in locations subject to
static electricity or electrical noise.
• Do not use or store this media in the following
locations:
—Where recommended operating conditions
are exceeded.
—Inside a closed car in summer; or in strong
sunshine / under direct sunlight / near a
heater, etc.
—Humid or corrosive location
Handling SxS Memory Cards
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Verify the correct direction of insertion before
use.
For write protection
• When storing or carrying this media, put this
media in the carrying case and lock it firmly.
Setting the write-protect switch of the SxS
memory card to “WP” disables you to record, edit
or delete data.
Write-protect switch
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of
important data. Sony accepts no responsibility
for any damage or loss of data you recorded.
• Do not apply a label sheet in places other than
the label space. When applying the label sheet
to this media, do not allow it to protrude from its
proper location.
Note
Do not operate the write-protect switch of an SxS
memory card while it is set in the camcorder.
Temporarily remove the card from the camcorder
before changing the switch setting.
Inserting/Removing an SxS
Memory Card
Label space
SLOT SELECT button
• SxS memory cards to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. If a card is formatted
using other device, it is regarded as of a
different format, requiring repeated format
operation on this camcorder.
ACCESS lamps
SLOT SELECT
A
B
Card slots
CH-1
AUDIO
LEVEL
CH-2
• Deleting with the function of the camcorder
does not completely delete data on this media.
When transferring or disposing of this media,
use a commercial data deleting software or
destroy the actual body at you own
EJECT buttons
OPEN
R
L
Cover
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
responsibility.
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
• If the available recording time on a card is short,
clip operation may be restricted. In such a case,
delete unnecessary files by using a PC.
• Remove or reinsert the case card with the case
opened properly.
81.2
DI
BA SP
TT LA
FO BA
IN
Y
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
A
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
E
.6
C
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
PR
/S
P
ILE
S&
E
L
F
B
Q
S
O
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
XT
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
L
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
EX1R
-
L
M
H
HIT
E
IO
INT
E
BA
D
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
PMW
DIO
LE
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Inserting an SxS memory card
1
2
Slide the cover to the left to open.
Insert the SxS memory card into the
slot.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
3
NU
E
M
A
S
&Q
U
N
B
E
M
A
S
L
O
T
S
E
S
&
Q
L
E
B
C
T
S
L
O
T
S
E
FU
LL
LE
C
T
A
U
FU
LL
A
A
M
A
M
C
H
-1
-1
H
C
C
-1
H
IO
-1
H
B
D
C
AL
U
E
A
S
T
A
C
U
V
D
E
IO
L
LE
IO
B
D
LE
AL
U
E
A
S
T
A
C
A
U
D
E
IO
L
LE
M
L
E
V
A
M
-2
H
P
C
H
C
E
-2
N
-2
C
H
H
C
-2
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
With the label
facing right
Notes
The ACCESS lamp lights in red then changes
to green once the memory card is ready for
use.
• Data are not guaranteed if the power is turned
off or a memory card is removed while the card
is being accessed. All data on the card may be
destroyed. Be sure that the ACCESS lamps are
lit in green or off when you turn off the power
or remove memory cards.
• When you turn the camcorder on by setting the
power switch to MEDIA (Media mode), a
display to show that an SxS memory card is
being confirmed appears on the LCD monitor/
EVF screen.
3
Close the cover.
Status indications by the ACCESS lamps
Card slots A and B are accompanied by the
respective ACCESS lamps to indicate their
statuses.
Lamp
Lights in
Slot statuses
Accessing the loaded SxS memory card
red
(writing/reading data)
Lights in
green
Standby (ready for recording or
playback using the loaded SxS memory
card)
Off
• No SxS memory card is loaded.
• The loaded card is invalid.
• An SxS memory card is loaded, but
another slot is active.
The display automatically changes to the
memory card is inside, but it remains on the
screen if no valid memory card is loaded.
Removing an SxS memory card
Switching Between SxS Memory
Cards
1
Open the cover, once press the EJECT
button to release the lock, then pull the
button out.
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
slots A and B, press the SLOT SELECT button to
select the card you wish to use.
3
If a card becomes full during recording, switching
to the other card is automatically executed.
U
N
E
M
A
S
&
Q
B
S
LO
T
S
E
LE
C
T
FU
LL
A
U
A
M
C
-1
H
-1
H
C
Note
IO
BA
D
U
E
L
A
S
T
A
C
U
D
E
IO
L
LE
L
E
V
A
M
-2
O
H
P
C
H
C
E
-2
N
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled while
playback is in progress. Switching is not executed
even if you press the button. The button is enabled
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
Press and unlock
the button.
Formatting an SxS Memory Card
2
Press the EJECT button again to
remove the card.
Formatting may be required before using an SxS
memory card with this camcorder. For an SxS
Handling SxS Memory Cards
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
memory card that is not formatted or that was
formatted with another system, a message to
confirm if formatting is to be executed is
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Checking the Remaining Time
Available for Recording
In Camera mode, you can check the time
remaining for the SxS memory cards loaded in the
card slots on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Note on formatting
Any SxS memory card formatted with a device
other than this camcorder cannot be used with the
camcorder.
120min
A: 185 min
STBY
T
To execute formatting
B: - - - min
Z99
If the message for formatting is displayed,
turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select
“Execute” then press the dial or joystick.
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of each card and
displayed in time units of minutes.
The remaining can also be checked in a meter
format on the BATTERY/MEDIA status screen
Formatting begins.
The in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Note
Recording/playback during formatting
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
formatting is in progress.
A
icon appears if the memory card is write-
protected.
Replacing an SxS memory card
If formatting fails
A write-protected SxS memory card or memory
card that cannot be used with this camcorder will
not be formatted.
As a warning message is displayed, replace the
card with an appropriate SxS memory card, as per
the instructions in the message.
• If the available time on two cards in total
becomes less than 5 minutes, a message “Media
Near Full,” flashing of the tally lamps, and a
beep sound will warn you. Replace the cards
with those with sufficient space.
• If you continue recording until the total
remaining time reaches zero, the message
changes to “Media Full,” and recording stops.
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen, you can execute
the OTHERS menu in the same manner.
Note
Approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one
SxS memory card at maximum.
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit,
the remaining time indication becomes “0,” and
the message “Media Full” is displayed.
Notes
• All the data, including recorded pictures and
setup files, are erased when a memory card is
formatted.
• SxS memory cards to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. Any card formatted
with other device must be formatted again with
this camcorder.
Restoring an SxS Memory Card
If an error occurs with data in a memory card for
some reason, the card must be restored.
If an SxS memory card that needs to be restored
is loaded, a message that prompts you to execute
a restore operation is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To restore a card
Using an External Hard
Disk
Select “Execute” by turning the jog dial or
tilting the joystick then push the dial or
joystick.
The restore operation begins.
You can use an optional PHU-60K, PHU-120K,
or PHU-120R Professional Hard Disk Unit with
this camcorder.
During restoration, the in-progress message and
status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS
lamp is lit in red.
Notes
When restoration is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
properly achieved with the PHU-60K/120K/
120R.
cannot be made with the PHU-60K/120K/120R.
If restoration fails
• A write-protected SxS memory card or one on
which an error occurred cannot be restored. For
such a card, a warning message is displayed.
Release the write protection or replace the card,
as per the instructions in the message.
• An SxS memory card on which an error
occurred may become usable again through
repeated formatting.
Attaching/Removing the PHU-60K/
120K/120R
Recording/playback can be made using the PHU-
60K/120K/120R in the same manner as with SxS
memory cards if you connect the PHU connection
cable of the PHU-60K/120K/120R to an SxS
memory card slot of the camcorder.
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
• The following operation may restore an SxS
memory card for which the message “Could not
Restore Some Clips” is repeatedly displayed
each time you try the restoration process:
Mounting the hard disk unit on the
camcorder
1 Copy necessary clips to another SxS memory
the camcorder or the XDCAM EX Clip
By using the cold shoe kit (an auxiliary shoe, four
screws, and a bottom plate) supplied with the
camcorder, you can mount the hard disk unit on
the rear accessory shoe of the camcorder.
Mount the auxiliary shoe on the rear accessory
shoe.
2 Format the problem SxS memory card, using
the format function of this camcorder.
3 Return the necessary clips to the SxS
memory card by copy operation.
Auxiliary shoe
Recording/playback during restoration
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
restoration is in progress.
Rear accessory
shoe
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
l
P
R
j
H
E
F
O
V
R
E
L
D
S
s
V
T
T
A
R
S
G
H
U
T
R
O
T
P
S
/
E
P
S
/
A
L
M
T
C
L
Y
N
A
O
N
/
P
P
E
A
L I
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
L
S
/
O
F
L
E
T
H
D
V
W
F
/D
D
R
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A
B
O
L N
F
Y
A
I
T
P
T
A
B
D
S
I
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
/
O
I
T
N
N
T
I
A
T
O
B
-
R
H
G
U
/
U
D
I
C
L .
T
T
B
H
D
C
G
I
D
R
B
L
C
L
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
O
S
R
T
C
A
H-1
A
U
D
IO
I
N
C
O
O
U
M
T
P
O
N
C
H-2
E
N
T
A
/V
M
O
IC
U
L
IN
T
R E L E A S
E
M
E
IC
+4
8V
M
IC
LIN
E
H
M
IC
D
M
+
4
I
O
8V
U
T
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
1
Place the auxiliary shoe on the rear
accessory shoe and secure it with the
four screws.
Using an External Hard Disk
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
U
N
E
M
A
S
&
Q
B
S
L
O
T
S
E
L
E
C
T
FU
LL
A
M
C
H
-1
-1
H
C
IO
E
BA
D
L
U
E
L
A
S
T
A
E
C
U
V
D
E
IO
L
L
A
M
-2
O
P
C
H
H
C
-2
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
2
Fit the bottom plate (spring type) into
the auxiliary shoe.
Insert so that the cable extends upward.
3
Turn on the PHU-60K/120K/120R.
Slits for screw holes
The POWER indicator of the PHU-60K/
120K/120R lights in green.
Subsequently, the ACCESS lamp of the
camcorder lights in red then changes to green
once the unit is ready for use.
Bottom plate
Notes
• The cover of the card slot block cannot be
closed with the PHU-60K/120K/120R
connected.
• Bundle the cable so that it will not accidentally
get on nearby objects.
Insert the bottom plate from the end where the
slits for the screw holes of the auxiliary shoe are
not open.
If you secure the auxiliary shoe in the direction
opposite that shown in the above figure with the
slit open end forward, insert the bottom plate
from the direction opposite to that shown in the
figure.
To disconnect the PHU connection cable
Operate in the same manner as when you remove
an SxS memory card from the slot.
3
Attach the shoe adapter (supplied with
the PHU-60K/120K/120R) to the hard
disk unit, mount the unit to the
auxiliary shoe on the camcorder, and
secure it with the lock lever of the shoe
adapter
Formatting the PHU-60K/120K/
120R
For a PHU-60K/120K/120R that is not formatted
or that was formatted with another system, a
message to confirm if formatting is to be executed
is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Any PHU-60K/120K/120R formatted with a
device other than this camcorder cannot be used
with the camcorder.
For details, refer to the instructions supplied
with the PHU-60K/120K/120R.
Connecting the PHU connection cable
1
2
Set the power switch of the camcorder
to the CAMERA position.
To execute formatting
If the message for formatting is displayed,
turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select
“Execute” then press the dial or joystick.
Open the cover of the card slot block
and plug the PHU connection cable into
a slot.
Formatting begins.
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Using an External Hard Disk
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To format by menu operation
To restore the hard disk
When no formatting message is displayed on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen, you can execute
the OTHERS menu in the same manner.
Select “Execute” by turning the jog dial or
tilting the joystick then push the dial or
joystick.
The restoration begins.
Notes
During restoration, an in-progress message and
status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS
lamp is lit in red.
When restoration is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
• Formatting for the PHU-60K/120K/120R on
this camcorder is “Quick Format” with which
only the managerial data are erased. To erase
the recording data completely, connect the unit
to a PC and perform “Full Format.”
If restoration fails
• The PHU-60K/120K/120R to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. Any PHU-60K/
120K/120R formatted with another device must
be formatted again with this camcorder.
• A PHU-60K/120K/120R on which an error
occurred may become usable again through
repeated formatting.
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
Checking the Remaining Time
Available for Recording
In Camera mode, the remaining capacity (in
minutes) of the PHU-60K/120K/120R connected
via a card slot is displayed on the LCD monitor/
EVF screen.
120min
A: 185 min
STBY
T
B: - - - min
Z99
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of the hard disk
and displayed in time units of minutes.
The remaining capacity can also be checked in a
meter format on the BATTERY/MEDIA status
Restoring the PHU-60K/120K/
120R
If an error occurs with data on the PHU-60K/
120K/120R for some reason, the hard disk must
be restored.
If a PHU-60K/120K/120R that needs to be
restored is connected, a message that prompts you
to execute restoration is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
Using an External Hard Disk
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
• In formatting, all data in a “Memory Stick,”
including protected images, are erased and
cannot be restored.
Using a “Memory Stick”
with the Media Adaptor
• This camcorder uses a unique format, which
differs from the standard “Memory Stick”
format, for recording. For this reason, inserting
a “Memory Stick” formatted with this
camcorder and in which data have been
recorded into a “Memory Stick” slot of a PC
may cause a malfunction of the PC or may
damage the recorded data.
Use of the optional MEAD-MS01 Media Adaptor
permits you to insert a “Memory Stick” to the SxS
memory card slot of the camcorder and use it for
recording and playback in the same way as with
an SxS memory card.
Usable “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo HX” series
Connection between the camcorder and a PC
To use a “Memory Stick” in which data have been
recorded with an XDCAM EX-series product,
establish USB connection between the PC and
this camcorder and insert it into the slot of the
camcorder, or use a specified USB card reader.
1)For details on the USB card reader, visit the XDCAM
For details on use of the MEAD-MS01 Media
Adaptor, refer to the operating instructions of the
adaptor.
Notes
1)
properly achieved with a “Memory Stick.”
cannot be made with a “Memory Stick.”
To use a “Memory Stick” formatted with this
camcorder with other devices
With a PC
Formatting a “Memory Stick”
1.First make a backup copy of the data recorded
in the “Memory Stick.”
A “Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo HX” to be used
with this camcorder must be formatted using the
format function of this camcorder.
For a “Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo HX” that is
not formatted or that was formatted with another
system, a message to confirm if formatting is to
be executed is displayed on the LCD monitor/
EVF screen.
2.When the backup is done, establish USB
connection between the PC and this
camcorder, insert the “Memory Stick” into the
slot of this camcorder, then format it from the
menu of the PC.
The formatting method depends on the OS of the PC.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the
PC to be used.
With a non-PC device having a “Memory Stick”
slot
1.First make a backup copy of the data recorded
in the “Memory Stick.”
To execute formatting
If the message for formatting is displayed,
turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select
“Execute” then press the dial or joystick.
2.When the backup is done, format the “Memory
Stick” with the device to be used.
Formatting begins.
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
For details on the formatting method, refer to the
operating instructions of the device to be used.
• “Memory Stick” and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo” and
To format by menu operation
When no formatting message is displayed on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen, you can execute
the OTHERS menu in the same manner.
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
Using a “Memory Stick” with the Media Adaptor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Recording
Basic Operation Procedure
Basic recording can be performed with the following procedures:
REC START/STOP
7,8
LCD monitor
4
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
O
V
T
E
S
/
L
E
L
D
W
N
L
O
M
F
F
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
/P
T
X
E
N
N
M
Y
A
U
H
L
P
/
T
V
E
R
P
O
T
S
F
REC REVIEW
V
E
R
P
P
O
T
S
C
E
/
T
R
R
A
T
S
D
L
O
H
9
T
H
L
F
F
O
A
T
S
H
N
S
IT
R
A
O
T
IO
B
N
L
RI
G
ANDED
B
C
D
H
T
L
C
D
B
.L
T
R
EXP
T
U
C
A
IG
DU /U
-B
IT
/
H
T
2
O
TIO
N
.
N
R
S
T
A
1
S
8
D
IS
A
T
T
B
P
IN
L
A
F
O
Y
B
A
R
S
/C
A
M
40
IRIS
L
E
N
S
9
IN
F
.
5
O
1
B
5
R
2
T
D
IS
P
H
IS
T
O
0
3
8
GR
.
A
M
0
2
1
IA
T
F
M
F
D
N
A
O
A
E
N
U
1
M
E
A
T
L
ND
FIL
N
A
U
U
T
O
A
R
O
4
S
S
O
TER
2
E
IG
M
P
OFF
MEDIA
N
A
5
1
M
C
M
A
C
5
RO
3
O
L
E
C
C
CAMERA
1
N
5.6
A
C
2
T
V
/
U
0
O
3
A
1
8
IN
C
O
D
5 . 8
FF
O
N
1
U
E
E
N
R
E
U
M
T
T
FOCUS
1
A
E
IC
/S
P
P
IL
S
L
F
&
E
O
Q
S
B
R
Z
E
S
LO
B
C
R
T
A
S
E
LE
P
E
CT
A
K
IN
T
G
N
I
H D M I
F
U
M
L
L
AN
T
UA
A
X
L
U
T
O
E
A
U
O
TO
F
F
O
T
U
A
L
L
A
U
N
A
M
IO
G
D
A
1
-
U
IN
CH
A
R
1
-1
H
C
IN
X
E
W
L
M
H
HIT
-
W
E
I
E
O
N
T
X
B
D
L
I
E
A
U
L
A
T
D
P
T
A
E
C
U
V
DIO
B
A
E
S
L
O
T
N
E
U
A
L
A
M
A
P
U
A
S
T
Power switch: CAMERA
2
-
C
H
H
-2
C
O
P
E
N
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
Lens cap OPEN
Battery pack
3
1
FULL AUTO
Memory card(s)
6
2
When using the remote commander, activate the remote
Preparations
Note
1
2
Mount a fully charged battery pack.
Load SxS memory card(s).
When you hold the camcorder by the grip,
support it from underneath with your left hand.
If you load two cards, recording is continued
by automatically switching to the second
card when the first card becomes full.
3
4
Pull up on the lens cap open/close lever
to open the lens cap built in the lens
hood.
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for
the best view.
When you wish to use the EVF, fold the LCD
monitor to its park position and adjust the
angle of the EVF.
Recording (Full Auto mode)
5
Set the power switch to the CAMERA
position.
6
Press the FULL AUTO button so that
the button indicator lights.
The camcorder is turned on and enters
Camera mode.
Basic Operation Procedure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Full Auto mode is turned on, activating the
121).
REC
START/STOP
Thus Auto Iris, AGC (Auto Gain Control),
Auto Shutter, ATW (Auto Tracing White)
are set to ON, whereby the brightness and
white balance will be automatically adjusted.
HOLD
REC HOLD lever
To unlock the button, return the lever to its
original position.
When you wish to adjust them manually, turn Full
Auto mode off, and see;
Checking the last recorded clip (Rec
Review)
9
Press the REC REVIEW button.
Note
activated, and the last recorded clip is played
back for the specified time on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
AF (Auto Focus) is not activated by setting
the camcorder to Full Auto mode.
For information of automatic focus adjustment,
see page 59.
When playback reaches the end of the clip,
the camcorder returns to STBY (recording
standby) mode.
7
8
Press the REC START/STOP button.
You can start with either of the REC START/
STOP button on the handle or that on the
grip.
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the REC button simultaneously with the unmarked
button.)
To delete clips
You can delete the last recorded clip by using the
Last Clip DEL function.
Use the All Clips DEL function when you wish to
delete all recorded clips from a memory card.
The front and rear tally lamps light and
recording begins.
To stop recording, press the REC
START/STOP button again.
To specify a clip to be deleted, operate the
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the REC PAUSE button simultaneously with the
unmarked button.)
camcorder in Media mode.
Recording stops and the camcorder enters
STBY (recording standby) mode.
Note
If you press the REC START/STOP button to
start next recording while previous data writing is
not completed, the message “Cannot Proceed”
may be displayed and recording may not start.
To prevent a switching error
The REC START/STOP button on the handle is
incorporated with the REC HOLD lever. If the
REC START/STOP button on the handle will not
be used, it is recommended to set the lever to the
HOLD position to lock the button.
Basic Operation Procedure
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L
Clip (recording data) and clip name
When you stop recording, video, audio and
subsidiary data from the start to end of the
recording are recorded as a single clip on an
SxS memory card.
Selecting the Video
Format
For each clip recorded with this camcorder, a
clip name of 8 characters (the first four
alphanumerics and the second four numerics) is
automatically generated.
You can select various video formats for
recording/playback using “HD/SD Mode” and
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu.
The current format is displayed on the screen
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
Example: ABCD0001
The first four alphanumerics can be specified as
OTHERS menu before you start recording. (It
cannot be changed after recording.)
The second four-digit number is automatically
counted up in sequence.
TBY
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
1920/60i
H
Q
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
Notes on Clips
Selectable Formats
The XDCAM EX-series products limit the
maximum file size of an HD clip to 4GB and
that of an SD clip to 2GB. If you continue
recording for an extended period, recorded
materials may be segmented into multiple files,
depending on the file size (the maximum
number of partitions is 99). The camcorder
regards continuous recording as one clip even if
it has been segmented into multiple files.
A long clip can be recorded crossing over two
memory cards in slot A and B.
The selectable formats vary depending on the
“HD/SD Mode” setting and “Country” (NTSC
OTHERS menu.
HD Mode
When the camcorder is set to HD Mode, the video
formats set on this camcorder cover the recording
bit rate (HQ/SP), recording picture size
(horizontal resolution), recording frame rate, and
recording scan system (i/P).
When you copy clips to a hard disk drive, etc.
using a computer, it is recommended to use the
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software on the
supplied CD-ROM.
The frame rates are indicated with two-digit
integers, rounding off the fractional part.
Note
When you select an HQ format, recording is made
with the bit rate of 35 Mbps VBR.
When you select an SP format, recording is made
with the HDV-compatible bit rate of 25 Mbps
CBR.
If copying is done using Explorer (Windows)
or Finder (MAC), the continuity and
relationships of recorded materials may not be
maintained.
Maximum duration of a clip
With “NTSC Area” selected
In HD Mode, a clip can be 24 hours long at
maximum. If a clip exceeds 24 hours, it is
automatically divided.
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
HQ 1920/60i
HQ 1920 × 1080
59.94 interlace
HQ 1440 × 1080
59.94 interlace
SP 1440 × 1080
59.94 interlace
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1920 × 1080
29.97 Progressive
Selecting the Video Format
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
HQ 1440 × 1080
29.97 Progressive
HQ 1920 × 1080
23.98 Progressive
HQ 1440/30P
720 × 480
29.97 Progressive, squeeze
DVCAM30P SQ
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
SP 1440/24P
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
720 × 480
29.97 Progressive, edge crop
DVCAM30P EC
HQ 1440 × 1080
23.98 Progressive
SP 1440 × 1080
23.98 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
59.94 Progressive
With “PAL Area” selected
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
DVCAM50i SQ
720 × 576
50 interlace, squeeze
HQ 1280 × 720
29.97 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
23.98 Progressive
720 × 576
50 interlace, edge crop
DVCAM50i EC
DVCAM25P SQ
DVCAM25P EC
720 × 576
25 Progressive, squeeze
720 × 576
25 Progressive, edge crop
With “PAL Area” selected
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
Note
HQ 1920 × 1080
50 interlace
HQ 1920/50i
There are the following limitations in SD Mode:
• The following special recording modes cannot
be used.
—Slow & Quick Motion
—Interval Rec
—Frame Rec
• OK mark and shot marks cannot be applied to
clips.
HQ 1440 × 1080
50 interlace
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
SP 1440 × 1080
50 interlace
HQ 1920 × 1080
25 Progressive
HQ 1440 × 1080
25 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
50 Progressive
HQ 1280 × 720
25 Progressive
Switching between HD and SD
For HD/SD switching use “HD/SD Mode” of the
OTHERS menu.
When you change the menu setting, the
camcorder automatically restarts, executing the
switching.
SD Mode (DVCAM mode)
When the camcorder is set to SD Mode, the video
formats set on this camcorder cover the recording
frame rate, recording scan system (i/P), and
aspect (SQ/EC).
The frame rates are indicated with two-digit
integers, rounding off the fractional part.
When you select SD Mode, recording is made
with the bit rate of 25 Mbps CBR.
Note
HD/SD switching is disabled during recording
and playback.
1
Press the MENU button to set the
camcorder to Menu mode, display the
OTHERS menu with
“HD/SD Mode.”
, and select
With “NTSC Area” selected
Format
Indication on this
camcorder
720 × 480
DVCAM60i SQ
59.94 interlace, squeeze
720 × 480
DVCAM60i EC
59.94 interlace, edge crop
Selecting the Video Format
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
O
THERS
Battery INFO
B
:
:
Direct
i. LINK I/
Tr i gger
ountry
HD SD
Video For
M
enu
O
M
Pa r t
isable
D
Note on recording format in SP 1440/24P mode
ode : Both
00:00
C
:
:
:
NTSC Area
HD
SD 080/60i
When recording in SP 1440 × 1080 mode at 23.98
in Progressive mode (indicated as SP 1440/24P
on this camcorder), pictures are recorded at 59.94
in Interlace mode (indicated as SP 1440/60i) by
pull-down processing.
/
Mode
m
at
2
3
Select the desired mode.
A confirmation message is displayed.
Change Mode?
HD > SD
Execute
C
ancel
Select “Execute.”
The camcorder is automatically turned off,
then is restarted, activating the menu setting.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
For the menu items “Video Format,” “Output
Select” and “i.LINK I/O” the settings for HD
Mode and those for SD Mode are independently
stored in memory. When you switch between HD
and SD, these items are automatically changed to
the conditions corresponding to the selected
mode.
Changing the Format
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the OTHERS menu with
, and set “Video Format.”
O
THERS
Di rect
i. LINK I/
Tr i gger
ountry
HD SD
Video For
l i p
M
enu
O
ode
:
:
:
:
:
:
B
HQ 1920/60i
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
M
C
00:00
/
Mode
m
at
C
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Signals from the COMPONENT OUT, SDI
OUT, A/V OUT, and HDMI OUT connectors are
also output according to the format selected with
this menu.
Selecting the Video Format
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switching the ND Filters
Adjusting the White
Balance
ND filters are available for keeping the aperture
in a proper range.
Set the ND filter switch according to the
brightness of the subject.
The white balance must be adjusted to suit to the
color temperature of the light source.
You can select the adjustment mode according to
the shooting conditions.
Preset mode
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
The color temperature is adjusted to the preset
value (factory setting: 3200K) in this mode.
Select this mode when there is no time to adjust
the white balance or when you wish to fix the
white balance to the condition of you set for a
Picture Profile.
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
ER
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
AM
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
S&
E
L/S
FILE
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
XT
L
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
DIO
IN
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
INT
BA
DIO
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
E
E
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
ND
FILTER
Memory A mode, Memory B mode
2
1
• The white balance is adjusted to the value stored
in memory A or memory B.
ND filter switch
• Pressing the WHT BAL button executes auto
white balance and stores the adjusted value in
memory A or memory B.
OFF
1
1
2:
/
ND
64
1: / ND
8
OFF: Clear
ATW (Auto-Tracing White balance) mode
In this mode, the camcorder automatically adjusts
the white balance to the appropriate condition.
When the color temperature of the light source
changes, the white balance adjustment is
automatically executed.
Five steps of adjustment speed can be selected
SET menu.
The ND filter number is displayed on the screen
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
Holding the ATW value
Note
When the ATW Hold function is assigned to an
assignable button, you can momentarily hold the
ATW value to fix the white balance, even in
ATW mode, by pressing the button.
No indication is obtained if the ND filter switch is
set to OFF.
For details on the assignable buttons, see “Changing
Selecting the Adjustment Mode
Using the switch
You can select Preset mode, Memory A mode, or
ATW (Memory B) mode with the WHITE BAL
switch.
Switching the ND Filters / Adjusting the White Balance
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To the B position of the WHITE BAL switch,
ATW mode is assigned at the factory. The setting
Memory B mode.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between ATW and the mode set with the
WHITE BAL switch.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
WHITE BAL switch
Executing Auto White Balance
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
Execute auto white-balance adjustment according
to the color temperature of the light source.
The adjustment value can be stored in memory A
or B.
GAIN
WHITE BAL
L
M
H
B
A
PRST
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
Note
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
Auto white-balance adjustment cannot be
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
ER
O
T
ER
P
N
AM
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
executed in Preset mode.
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
M
ET
TU
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
E
/S
P
IL
S&
L
F
B
Q
SE
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
T
G
IN
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
EX
AUT
O
FF
TO
O
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
1
To store the adjustment value in
memory, select Memory A or Memory
B mode.
CA
CH
E
RE
C
B: ATW or Memory B mode
A: Memory A mode
PRST: Preset mode
2
3
Select the appropriate ND filter
according to the lighting condition.
Place a white subject under the same
lighting condition and zoom in on it so
that a white area is obtained on the
screen.
• Assigning the ATW on/off function to an
assignable button permits you to independently
activate/deactivate ATW when Full Auto mode
is off.
A white object (white cloth, a white wall,
etc.) near the subject may be used in place.
Be careful not to have any spots of high
illumination on the screen.
For details on the assignable buttons, see “Changing
4
5
Adjust the lens iris opening.
Using the Direct menu
Set it to the proper condition if the manual
iris adjustment mode is selected.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current adjustment mode and color
temperature are displayed on the screen.
Press the WHT BAL button.
Auto white-balance adjustment begins.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
ATW: ATW mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:P: Preset mode
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
select from among ATW, W:A, W:B, and W:P.
Adjusting the White Balance
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Markers
and Zebra Patterns
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
P
j
R
E
F
H
O
V
R
E
L
s
D
V
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
S
/
E
L
P
S
/
A
L
N
A
M
T
C
Y
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
F
E
T
S
/
L
O
F
T
I O
HD
V/D
W
D
R
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MI
C
O
U
T
LI
N
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
48
E
V
MI
C
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
During recording, various markers and zebra
patterns can be inserted into the image on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
This does not affect recording signals.
Displaying the Markers
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
ASSIGN
4
WHT BAL button
Use “Marker” of the LCD/VF SET menu.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the LCD/VF SET menu with
, and select “Marker” from the menu.
During adjustment, an in-progress message is
displayed on the screen. When the adjustment is
completed successfully, the message changes to a
completion message, and the obtained color
temperature is displayed.
• When you execute the adjustment in a memory
mode, the adjusted value is stored in memory
(A or B) selected in step 1.
LCD/VF SET
B
LCD
EVF
Peaking
Set t i ng
Safet y Zone
Safet y Area
:
:
O
O
n
n
B
B
B
B
B
: 90%
:
:
00:00
Marker
Center
Aspect
M
M
arker
arker
On
Zebra
Display
On
• When you execute the adjustment in ATW
mode, adjustment in ATW is resumed.
On/
O
f f
Aspect Select
: 4 : 3
If auto white-balance adjustment fails
An error message is displayed on the screen for
approximately three seconds.
If the error message is displayed, try auto white-
balance adjustment again.
If the error message continues to be displayed
after several attempts, consult your Sony service
representative.
Activating the marker indications
• Set “Setting” to “On” then turn the markers on/
off independently.
No marker is displayed when “Setting” is “Off.”
• Assigning the Marker on/off function to one of
the assignable buttons permits you to operate
“Setting: On/Off” by pressing the button.
For the assignable buttons, see “Changing
Displaying the safety-zone marker
Set “Safety Zone” to “On” to insert the safety-
zone marker to the screen.
With “Safety Area” you can select the size of the
safety-zone marker from among 80%, 90%,
92.5%, and 95% of the picture area.
Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example: 95%
Displaying the guide frame lines
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
Set “Guide Frame” to “On” to insert the guide
frame lines into the screen area.
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
When the aspect marker is on, the safety zone
marker shows the effective area within the aspect
marker.
Displaying the center marker
Displaying the Zebra Patterns
Set “Center Marker” to “On” to insert the center
marker into the screen area.
A zebra pattern(s) can be inserted to the picture
on LCD monitor/EVF screen to check the
appropriate luminance level.
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
Factory-set zebras
2 (100%)
Displaying the aspect marker
Set “Aspect Marker” to “On” to insert the aspect
marker into the screen area.
Turning the zebra-pattern indication on/
off
You can select the ratio of the aspect marker from
among 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.66:1, 1.85:1,
2.25:1, and 2.4:1 with “Aspect Select.”
Pressing the ZEBRA button turns the zebra
pattern-indication on/off.
Example: 4:3
120min
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
ZEBRA button
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
GAIN
WHITE BAL
L
M
H
B
A
PRST
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
E
N
U
/
H
P
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
You can also change the brightness of images
outside the aspect marker with “Aspect Mask.” It
can be selected in the range of 0% to 90% (10%
steps).
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
FF
D
5
O
U
E
E
N
1
N
R
IL
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
S&
L/S
F
B
Q
SE
O
PR
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
T
AU
EX
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Note
No aspect marker is displayed when a video
format of EC (Edge Crop) is selected in SD
Mode.
Changing the zebra pattern
Using “Zebra” of the LCD/VF SET menu, you
can change the zebra pattern to be displayed.
Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the LCD/VF SET menu with
, and select “Zebra” from the menu.
Setting the Gain
LCD/VF SET
B
LCD
EVF
Peaking
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the subject.
Select the setting mode required by the shooting
conditions.
B
B
00:00
B
Marker
B
B
Zebra
Display
Zebra Select : 1
Zebra1 Level : 70
On/Of f
Fixed gain mode (manual gain
adjustment)
Zebra Select
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
1 (Zebra1): To display a zebra pattern in the area
of 10% centering the video level set with
“Zebra1 Level.”
2 (Zebra2): To display a zebra pattern for the
video level over 100%.
Select the gain of the video amplifier, using the
switch or a menu operation.
AGC mode (automatic gain control)
The gain of the video amplifier is automatically
adjusted according to the picture brightness.
Both: To display both Zebra1 and Zebra2.
Zebra1 Level
Set the center level of Zebra1 in the range of 50 to
107%. The default setting is 70%.
Recording With Fixed Gain
Selecting the gain with the switch
Select the gain, using the GAIN switch.
Note
When AGC mode is on, the fixed gain cannot be
selected.
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
GAIN switch
GAIN
WHITE BAL
L
M
H
B
A
PRST
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
E
R
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
PR
E
P
IL
S&
L/S
F
B
Q
SE
O
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
T
G
IN
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
EX
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
The gain value at each of the switch positions are
set at the factory are as follows:
L: 0 dB
M: 9 dB
H: 18 dB
These values can be changed in the range of
–3 dB to +18 dB, using the CAMERA SET menu.
Setting the Gain
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
with
, and select “Gain Setup” from the
menu.
C
A
M
E
R
A SET
The electronic shutter of the camcorder permits
you to change the shutter speed (the accumulation
time per recording frame).
The electronic shutter can be adjusted
automatically or manually as required.
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
Low
Mid
High
:
:
:
0dB
9dB
18dB
B
B
S
lo
w
Shutter
00:00
B
A
: Of f
B
T
ype : Mul t i
Fixed Shutter (manual adjustment)
modes
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Recording is made with a specified shutter speed
(accumulation time).
Selecting gain using the Direct menu
Standard modes (Speed mode/Angle mode)
These modes may be especially effective when
you wish to record a quick-moving subject with
little blurring.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current gain value is displayed on the
screen.
You can select Speed mode or Angle mode. In
Angle mode, you can specify the shutter speed by
setting the shutter angle.
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
Specify the shutter speed by frequency. This
mode may be used to shoot the monitor screen
eliminating horizontal bands.
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the gain in steps of 3 dB with the Direct
menu by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
You can also select AGC mode with the Direct
menu.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between AGC and the gain selected with
the GAIN switch.
SLS (Slow Shutter) mode
For shooting a subject in low-level lighting
conditions. Specify the shutter speed in the
number of accumulated frames.
EX Slow Shutter mode
Note
This is an advanced mode of SLS mode. The
shutter speed is specified in the number of
accumulated frames. Up to 64 frames can be
accumulated in this mode, permitting you to
obtain low-noise clear pictures in low light levels
or a surreal pictures with afterimages.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Auto Shutter mode
Recording in AGC Mode
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
independently turn AGC mode on by setting
CAMERA SET menu or selecting AGC with the
Direct menu.
Shooting in a Fixed Shutter Mode
When you set the SHUTTER switch to ON, the
fixed shutter is turned on in the mode and with the
Setting the Electronic Shutter
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shutter speed you specified with “Shutter” of the
CAMERA SET menu.
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
25P
/
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
,
33 50 60 100 120 125 250
1
1
1
Note
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
30P
When Auto Shutter mode is ON, the fixed shutter
cannot be selected.
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
40 50 60 100 120 125 250
1
1
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000
Angle (standard angle) mode
Set “Mode” to “Angle,” and specify the shutter
angle with “Shutter Angle.”
You can select from among 180, 90, 45, 22.5, and
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
P
j
R
E
F
H
O
V
R
E
L
s
D
V
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
/ S
E
P
S
/
A
L
M
T
C
L
Y
N
A
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
I L
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
F
E
S
/
L
O
F
T
I T
HD
V/D
W
O
R
D
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
11.25 degrees.
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
S
N
A
T
O
H
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
U
A/
V
MI
C
O
U
LI
N
T
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
48
E
V
MI
C
LIN
E
H
M
IC
D
M
I
O
+
48
U
V
T
S
T
O
S
T
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Set “Mode” to “ECS,” and specify the frequency
with “ECS Frequency.”
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
The available setting values vary depending on
the current frame rate.
SLS (Slow Shutter) mode
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
Set “Mode” to “SLS,” and specify the number of
accumulated frames with “SLS Frame.”
You can select in the range of 2 to 8 frames.
ASSIGN
4
SHUTTER switch
Note
Setting the fixed shutter with the
CAMERA SET menu
Slow Shutter cannot be used in SP 1440/24P
mode or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
The shutter mode and shutter speed can be set
with the CAMERA SET menu.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu
Setting with the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current shutter mode and the set value
are displayed.
with
, and select “Shutter.”
CA
ME
RA
SET
B
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup
Shut ter
M
ode
:
Speed
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
Shut ter Speed: 1/125
Shut ter Angle : 180
ECS Frequency : 60.02
SLS Frame
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
O
++
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
S
hutter
00:00
A
Of f
Mul t i
:
2
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the shutter mode and speed with the
Direct menu by operating the joystick or the jog
dial.
B
T
ype
:
Speed (standard speed) mode
Set “Mode” to “Speed,” and specify the time
([ 1/setting value ] sec.) with “Shutter Speed.”
The available setting values vary depending on
the current frame rate.
Notes
• When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you
cannot turn the shutter on/off with the Direct
menu if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
If the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, only
switching between Auto Shutter and Shutter
OFF.
• The Direct menu cannot be selected when the
when the EX Slow Shutter mode is set to “On.”
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)
1
1
1
1
1
1
60i, 60P
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
60, 100 120 125 250 500
1
50i, 50P
1
,
/
1000 2000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24P
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
32 48 50 60 96 100 120
1
1
1
1
1
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
125 250 500 1000 2000
Setting the Electronic Shutter
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Adjusting the Iris
Shooting in EX Slow Shutter Mode
Select “EX Slow Shutter” from the CAMERA
SET menu.
Adjust the iris opening according to the
brightness of the subject. You can adjust it
manually or automatically.
CA
ME
RA
SET
B
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup
Shut ter
Auto Iris mode
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the subject.
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
S
hutter
Set t ing
Nu ber of
:
Of f
00:00
m
Frames : 16
A
Of f
Mul t i
B
T
ype
:
Manual Iris mode
Set “Setting” to “On,” and specify the number of
accumulated frames with “Number of Frames.”
You can select from among 16, 32, and 64 frames.
Adjust the iris opening using the iris ring or with
a menu operation.
IRIS switch
Notes
AF/MF
Full MF
IRIS
• EX Slow Shutter cannot be used in SP 1440/24P
mode or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
• The SHUTTER switch has no effect on the EX
Slow Shutter setting.
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
• The EX Slow Shutter On/Off setting cannot be
changed during recording.
Iris ring
R
L
CE
• You cannot set the camcorder to Full Auto
mode is set to “On.”
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
E
O
T
S
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
.9
FO
5
2
1
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
IA
T
M
FF
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
E
R
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
Shooting in Auto Shutter Mode
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
E
/S
P
I
C
I
L
S&
EL
F
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
XT
G
IN
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
U
E
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
independently turn Auto Shutter mode on by
setting “Auto Shutter” to “On” with “TLCS”
Recording in Auto Iris Mode
When Full Auto mode is off, you can turn it on by
setting the IRIS switch to AUTO.
You can select the target level (to make the
picture brighter or darker) of the Auto Iris control.
(The gain control in AGC mode and the shutter
speed control in Auto Shutter mode are adjusted
in synchronization.)
To adjust the target level with the Setup menu
CAMERA SET menu.
Adjusting the Iris
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the target level with the Direct menu
The target level can also be selected using the
Direct menu.
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the current setting is displayed on the
screen.
Adjusting the Zoom
You can adjust the zoom in Manual mode or
Power (Servo) mode on this camcorder.
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
Manual Zoom mode
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
Rotate the zoom ring to adjust the zoom.
You can change the setting with the Direct menu
by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
Power Zoom (Servo) mode
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
You can adjust the zoom by pressing the power
zoom lever or zoom button on the handle.
The supplied IR Remote Commander and
optional lens remote control unit can also be used.
Adjusting the Iris Manually
The current zoom position is displayed on the
screen in the range of 0 (Wide) to 99 (Tele) when
you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
Set the IRIS switch to MANUAL to adjust the iris
manually.
Rotate the iris ring for the desired iris opening.
To momentarily switch to Auto Iris mode
When you press the ONE PUSH AUTO IRIS
button in Manual Iris mode (IRIS switch:
MANUAL), Auto Iris control is activated while
you hold the button pressed. Manual Iris mode is
restored when you release the button.
120min STBY
A: 25min
B: 50min
Z99
STBY
The numerical indication can be changed to that
in a bar by changing the “Zoom Position” setting
SET menu.
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
120min STBY
A: 25min
STBY
P
j
R
F
H
E
V
O
R
L
s
E
V
D
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
/ S
E
P
S
/
A
L
M
T
C
L
Y
N
A
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
/ S
O
F
E
L
F
T
T
I
HD
V/D
W
O
R
D
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
B: 50min
W
A
R
T
S
CH
A
-1
AU
D
IO
IN
C
O
O
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
U
A/
V
MI
C
O
T
U
LI
N
T
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
E
48
V
MI
C
LIN
E
H
M
IC
D
M
I
O
+
48
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
Switching the Zoom Mode
I R I S
O T A U
O N E P U S H
ONE PUSH AUTO
IRIS button
Switching between Manual mode and Servo
mode is performed with the ZOOM switch
located on the bottom of the camcorder.
Adjusting the Zoom
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom speed switch
ZOOM button
Power zoom lever
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
P
j
R
F
H
E
V
O
R
L
s
E
V
D
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
S
/
E
L
P
S
/
A
L
N
M
T
C
Y
O
N
P
/
A
L
P
E
A
L I
REC
START/STOP
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
/ S
O
F
E
L
HD
V/
DV
W
F
T
O
R
T
I
D
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
T
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MIC
O
U
T
LI
N
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
48
W
E
V
MIC
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
HOLD
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
H
L
OFF
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
ZOOM
MANUAL SERVO
ZOOM switch
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
s
P
j
R
E
F
H
O
V
R
E
L
D
V
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
/ S
E
P
S
/
A
L
M
T
C
L
Y
N
A
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
I L
X
U
S
E
T
J
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
/ S
O
F
E
L
HD
F
T
T
I
W
O
R
V/
DV
D
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
D
IO
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MI
C
O
U
T
LIN
E
R
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
E
48
V
MI
C
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
Operating the Zoom Manually
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
Setting the ZOOM switch to the MANUAL
position for Manual Zoom mode activates the
zoom ring.
ZOOM
MANUAL SERVO
ZOOM switch:
SERVO
Rotate the zoom ring to adjust the zoom.
AF/MF
Full MF
To adjust with the power zoom lever on
the grip
IRIS
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OFF ON
FOCUS
Press the W (wide) side for a wider angle or the T
(telephoto) side for a closer angle.
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
Pressing the lever deeper sets zooming faster.
Zoom ring
R
L
E
C
N
A
R
C
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
To adjust with the ZOOM button on the
handle
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
Press the W side for a wider angle or the T side for
a closer angle.
Zooming is activated at the speed selected with
the speed switch.
TR SH
AN OT
SI
TI
B
ON
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
FF
D
5
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
M
ET
TU
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/S
P
S&
E
L
FILE
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
T
AU
EX
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
IN
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
The zoom speed assignment can be changed with
menu.
ZOOM
MANUAL SERVO
ZOOM switch:
MANUAL
Speed
switch
H
ZOOM button operation
Zoom changes with the speed set by
“High” of “Zoom Speed” of CAMERA
SET menu. (Default: 70)
Using the Power Zoom
L
Zoom changes with the speed set by
“Low” of “Zoom Speed” of CAMERA
SET menu. (Default: 30)
Setting the ZOOM switch to the SERVO position
for Servo mode activates the power zoom.
In Servo mode, the power zoom lever on the grip
and the ZOOM button on the handle are activated.
OFF
Disabled.
Adjusting the Zoom
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
Zoom operation is guaranteed with the zoom
speed settings from 8 to 99.
Adjusting the Focus
To select the operation at the beginning and the
end of zooming
You can select Soft mode for zooming, in which
the zooming speed is gradually increased at the
beginning then gradually decreased for the end.
SET menu.
You can select any of three modes for focus
adjustments.
Full MF (Full Manual Focus) mode
Only adjustment with the focus ring is effective in
this mode.
You can adjust the focus from ∞ to the minimum
length by rotating the ring. The ring rotates
endlessly in the both directions.
Zoom
Trans
setting
Linear
Operation at the beginning and
the end of zooming
Zooming immediately begins at the
(Default) specified speed when the ZOOM button
is pressed and immediately ends when
the button is released.
MF (Manual Focus) mode
Soft
Zooming gradually increases the speed
up to the specified speed after the ZOOM
button is pressed and gradually decreases
the speed and ends after the button is
released. (1 second at maximum from
when the button is released till the
operation ends.)
In this mode, auto focus can be temporarily
activated by pushing the PUSH AF button.
The MF Assist function can be used for
assistance.
AF (Auto Focus) mode
Auto focus functions continuously in this mode.
The focus ring and the PUSH AF button can also
be used.
Note
If “Zoom Speed” is set to a value less than 20, the
operation becomes the same as “Linear,” even
when “Soft” is selected.
Note
The infinity position has some margin to
compensate for focus change caused by variation
in ambient temperature. When shooting an image
at infinity in MF or Full MF mode, adjust the
focus while observing the image on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
When adjusting with the ZOOM button of
the IR Remote Commander
The zooming speed depends on the “Remote”
setting (default: 50) of “Zoom Speed” of the
CAMERA SET menu.
Note
Adjusting in Full MF Mode
Zoom operation is guaranteed with the zoom
Pull the focus ring rearward (toward the
camcorder body) to set the camcorder to Full MF
mode. Focus can only be adjusted with the focus
ring manually.
speed settings from 8 to 99.
To use the IR Remote Commander, see “Using the IR
When using a lens remote controller
Note
The focus instantly moves to the range index
position when you pull the focus ring rearward.
Zooming can also be controlled from an optional
lens remote controller connected via the LENS
REMOTE connector.
For operation of the optional lens remote controller,
refer to the operation guide of the lens remote
controller.
Adjusting the Focus
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peaking
R
When you press the PEAKING button, the
peaking function is activated. This function
emphasizes the contours of the images on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen, making manual
focusing easier.
This function does not affect recording signals.
The emphasis level and color of the contours can
SET menu.
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
0
4
/CA
M
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
E
R
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
M
5
1
MA
CA
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
N
U
E
1
N
E
UR
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/S
P
S&
E
L
FILE
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
XT
L
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
DIO
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
INT
BA
DIO
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
E
E
B
A
SE
LE
O
VE
T
L
A
U
L
A
P
AST
U
N
A
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
AF/MF
Full MF
PEAKING button
IRIS
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
GAIN
WHITE BAL
L
M
H
B
A
PRST
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
Range index
H
L
F
F
O
Focus ring: Rearward
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
observing the picture on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen.
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
N
U
E
E
1
N
R
FIL
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
S&
E
L/S
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LO
C
B
R
T
S
E
A
LE
D
PE
CT
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
XT
U
TO
E
AU
O
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
The range index of the focus ring is effective in
Full MF mode. The distances correspond to the
focus ring positions.
Adjusting in MF Mode
Expanded Focus
When you press the EXPANDED FOCUS
button, the center area of the picture is magnified
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, making the
focus adjustment easier.
Slide the focus ring forward (toward the lens
hood) and set the FOCUS switch to MANUAL to
set the camcorder to MF mode. In this mode, you
can activate Auto Focus only when required.
Press the EXPANDED FOCUS button again or
leave the focus ring unmoved for 5 seconds to
resume the normal angle for recording.
R
E
L
E
A
S
E
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
I E
W
E
R
C
F O C U S
E X P
A N D E D
EXPANDED
FOCUS
button
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
P
j
R
F
H
E
V
O
R
L
s
E
V
D
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
S
/
E
L
P
S
/
A
L
N
A
M
T
C
Y
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
F
E
S
/
L
O
F
T
T
I
HD
V/D
W
O
R
D
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MI
C
O
U
T
LI
N
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MI
C+
48
E
V
MI
C
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
Adjusting the Focus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Activating the MF Assist function using the Direct
menu
The current focus adjustment mode is displayed
on the screen when you press the DISPLAY/
BATT INFO button.
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
E
T
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
/S
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
TLCS
7 On
.
1
F
IA
T
M
F
N
AN
O
A
ED
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
ER
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
AM
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
6
.
CEL
C
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
N
U
E
1
R
EN
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/S
P
P
ILE
S&
EL
F
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
XT
L
U
TO
E
AU
O
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
DIO
IN
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
W
M
F
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
INT
E
∗
BA
DIO
L
L
A
U
SE
T
AU
CT
X
DIO
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
CA
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
CH
E
RE
C
In MF mode, you can activate/deactivate the MF
Assist function with the Direct menu by operating
the joystick or jog dial.
When the function is active, an asterisk mark is
displayed to the right of the mode indication.
AF/MF
Full MF
IRIS
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
Note
The Direct menu cannot be selected in a mode
other than MF mode.
Focus ring: Forward PUSH AF
button
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
FOCUS switch: MANUAL
Adjusting in AF Mode
Adjusting the focus with the focus ring
Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
observing the picture on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen.
The range index of the ring is invalid in MF
mode.
Slide the focus ring forward (toward the lens
hood) and set the FOCUS switch to AUTO to set
the camcorder to AF mode. In this mode, focus is
always adjusted automatically.
One-Push (Momentary) Auto Focusing
AF/MF
Full MF
IRIS
Push the PUSH AF button. Auto focusing
momentarily activates (One-Push Auto
Focusing).
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
One-Push Auto Focusing is terminated when the
subject comes in focus.
Focus ring: Forward
FOCUS switch:
AUTO
MF Assist function
When you stop rotating the focus ring with the
MF Assist function active, auto focusing starts,
performing fine focus adjustment for the subject
in the center of the screen. When the fine
adjustment is completed, automatic focusing with
the MF Assist function is terminated.
The range index of the ring is invalid in AF mode.
Focusing in AF mode
In AF mode the camcorder continuously checks
changes of images and activates auto focusing
each time it detects a change. The auto focus
adjustment is terminated when the subject comes
into focus, and the camcorder stands by until the
next change is detected.
In AF mode, auto focusing is also activated when
you press the PUSH AF button or operate the
focus ring.
Activating the MF Assist function using the
CAMERA SET menu
SET menu to “On.”
Adjusting the Focus
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Macro Mode
Eliminating Picture
When you set the MACRO switch to ON in AF or
MF mode, Macro mode is activated, permitting
you to adjust the focus in a range that includes the
micro area.
Blurring (Steady Shot)
By activating the Steady Shot function, blurring
of images due to camera shaking can be reduced.
The Macro mode is invalid in Full MF mode.
Setting with the CAMERA SET menu
AF/MF
Full MF
IRIS
SET menu to “On.”
MANUAL AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
OFF ON
FOCUS
CLOSE
MANUAL AUTO
PUSH AF
Setting with the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button, the setting of the Steady Shot function is
displayed on the screen.
MACRO switch
TLCS
.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PPOFF ND
1
You can turn it on/off with the Direct menu by
operating the joystick or the jog dial.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Note on use of a wide-conversion lens
Two operation modes are provided for Steady
Shot: Normal mode and Wide mode (for a wide
conversion lens).
When you attach the optional VCL-EX0877 wide
conversion lens, be sure to set “Wide
menu to “On.”
Note
If the camcorder is fixed to a tripod for stable
condition, deactivate the Steady Shot function.
Eliminating Picture Blurring (Steady Shot)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
The recommended “Mode” settings are shown
below.
Reducing Flickers
Flicker
Reduce/
Mode
Environments
Under lighting Under lighting
that may cause that does not
flicker
Recommended
cause flicker
Acceptable
To reduce flickers, try either of the following two
methods:
Auto
On
Acceptable
Not recommended
Recommended
Off
Not recommended
Setting the shutter speed according to
the power-supply frequency
the shutter speed according to the power supply
frequency.
When the frequency is 50 Hz
1
1
1
Set the shutter speed to / or
/
seconds.
seconds.
50
100
120
When the frequency is 60 Hz
1
Set the shutter speed to / or
/
60
Using the Flicker-Reduction function
the CAMERA SET menu to “Auto” or “On” and
set “Frequency” to the power-supply frequency
(50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Note
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
electronic shutter.
Recommended settings for flicker reduction
Frequency
Always set “Frequency” to the power-supply
frequency value appropriate for the shooting area.
Mode
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Off” when
shooting outdoors or under lighting that does
not cause flicker. (It can be also “Auto,” but the
compensation may not be done properly.)
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Auto”
when shooting indoors or under various lighting
that may cause flicker, such as fluorescent,
sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps. (If
continuously shooting under lighting that may
cause flicker, “Mode” should be set to “On.”)
Reducing Flickers
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mode selected with the TC/UB SET menu is
restored.
Setting the Time Data
Setting the Timecode
Specify the timecode to be recorded with
“Timecode” and “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET
menu.
Time data, such as the timecodes, user bits, and
the clock time, are recorded with pictures.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Running Modes of the Timecode
For the timecode, three running modes and Clock
TC/UB SET
mode can be selected.
B
Ti
mecode
Mode
: Preset
B
U
sers B i t
R
un
: Rec Run
Rec Run mode
TC For
m
at : DF Set t i ng : 00:00:00:00
00:00
R
eset
The timecode advances during recording only.
The continuity of the timecode is maintained
between clips in the sequence of recording as long
as the SxS memory card is not changed.
If you remove the memory card and record on
another card, the timecode will not continue when
you return the first card to the slot again.
Setting the timecode to a desired value
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Timecode” to “Preset.”
Specify the timecode value on the
Setting line and select “SET.”
Free Run mode
The timecode keeps advancing regardless of
recording.
Resetting the timecode
You can reset the timecode to be recorded in
running modes to “00:00:00:00.”
Regen mode
The timecode advances during recording only.
When you insert another memory card, the
camcorder starts next recording so that the
timecode continues to the last recorded timecode
on the card.
1
2
Select “Reset” of “Timecode.”
Select “Execute.”
Using the actual time as the timecode
Clock mode
Set “Mode” of “Time Code” to “Clock.”
The current clock time is recorded for the
timecode.
The time of the built-in clock is recorded as the
timecode.
Note
Switching between DF and NDF of the
timecode
• In Interval Recording, Frame Recording, Slow
& Quick Motion Recording, the timecode
advances in Rec Run mode regardless of the
“Run” setting if you set “Mode” of “Timecode”
to “Preset” with the TC/UB SET menu. If you
set it to “Clock,” the timecode advances in
Regen mode.
• When the Picture Cache function is active
(P.Cache Rec Setting: On), the timecode always
advances in Free Run mode. When the Picture
Cache Rec function is deactivated, the running
Using “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET menu, DF
(drop-frame mode) and NDF (non-drop frame
mode) of the timecode can be switched.
Note, however, that the mode is fixed either to DF
or NDF regardless of the TC Format setting,
depending on the current frame-rate setting.
Setting the Time Data
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“24PsF” for 1920/24P in Camera mode, there may be
a field that has dual timecodes on the display.
3)With DF, the frame digits can be set as desired in the
range of 00 to 29.
With NDF, the frame at the beginning of recording is
limited to 00, 05, 10, 15, 20, or 25.
Restrictions on the timecode
The timecode setting is restricted by the current
video format.
Video formats Frame
setting
TC Format
HQ 1920/60i
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
00 to 29
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in
Clock mode)
Setting the User Bits
You can add a hexadecimal number of 8 digits for
pictures as the user bits.
The user bits can also be set to the current date.
Use “Users Bit” of the TC/UB SET menu.
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
DVCAM60i SQ
DVCAM60i EC
DVCAM30P SQ
DVCAM30P EC
HQ 1920/50i
TC/UB SET
00 to 24
Fixed to NDF
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i
B
Ti
m
ecode
B
U
sers B i t
Mode
: Fix
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
DVCAM50i SQ
DVCAM50i EC
DVCAM25P SQ
DVCAM25P EC
TC For
mat : DF Set t i ng : 20 07 12 08
00:00
Setting eight digits as desired
1)
3)
2)
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
HQ 1280/24P
SP 1440/24P
00 to 23
00 to 29
Fixed to NDF
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Fix.”
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in
Clock mode)
Specify the values on the Setting line
and select “SET.”
You can set hexadecimal digits A to F with
the corresponding alphabetics.
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/25P
00 to 29
(double
count)
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in
Clock mode)
00 to 24
(double
count)
Fixed to NDF
Recording the current date as the user
bits
00 to 29
DF/NDF switchable
(Fixed to DF in
Clock mode)
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Date.”
The current date is displayed on the Setting line.
00 to 24
Fixed to NDF
1)The frame digits in “Setting” is limited to 00, 04, 08,
12, 16, and 20.
Displaying the Time Data
The frame at the beginning of recording is limited to
00, 04, 08, 12, 16, or 20.
In Camera mode, pressing the DISPLAY/BATT
INFO button displays the time data on the screen.
As the SDI OUT connector output becomes 60i
because of the 2-3 pull-down process except when
24P in Camera mode, the frame digits of the timecode
added to the SDI OUT connector output are changed
to values in the range of 00 to 29.
T
REC
TCG 00:00:00:00
1920/24P
H
Q
2)Even in Clock mode, the timecode is gradually
shifted, because it is counted by NDF.
As any output becomes 2-3 pulled-down video except
those from the SDI OUT and COMPONENT OUT
The indication is switched among the timecode,
user bits, and recording duration each time you
press the TC/U-BIT/DURATION button.
Setting the Time Data
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display
Contents
TCG **:**:**:** Tmecode
Recording Audio Signals
CLK **:**:**:** Timecode (Clock mode)
UBG ** ** ** ** User bits
DUR **:**:**
Duration from the beginning of
recording
Two channels (CH-1/CH-2) of audio can be
recorded (Linear PCM recording) in
synchronization with video recording.
You can use the built-in stereo microphones
(omni-directional electret condenser
microphones) or 2-channel external audio inputs
to the AUDIO IN connectors by switching with
the AUDIO IN switches.
AUDIO IN
connectors:
To input external
sources
AUDIO IN
CH-1
CH-2
LINE/MIC/MIC+48V
switches:
MIC
MIC
LINE
MIC+48V LINE
MIC+48V
To select the type of
external source
Built-in stereo microphones
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
l
P
j
R
F
H
E
V
O
R
L
S
s
E
V
D
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
T
G
R
O
L
P
M
S
/
E
L
P
S
/
A
N
A
T
C
Y
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
S
E
T
J
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
/ S
O
F
E
L
HD
V/D
V
W
F
T
O
R
T
I
D
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
-1
A
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MIC
O
U
T
LI
N
E
MIC
+4
8V
M
IC
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
U
T
V
I R
BA
TT
ER
I S
A
U
O
N
T
E
R
Y
O
P
EL
EA
SE
U
S
H
S
O
N
M
LE
E
T
E
R
SD
I
O
U
T
MENU
CANCEL
S&Q
SEL/SET
AUTO
MANUAL
INTMIC
EXT
CH-1
CH-1
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
LEVEL
AUTO
INTMIC
EXT
CH-2
CH-2
MANUAL
CACHE REC
AUDIO IN switches:
To select the source
AUDIO SELECT switches:
To select the recording level
adjustment mode
AUDIO LEVEL controls:
To adjust the recording levels
Recording Audio Signals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Using the Built-in Stereo
Microphones
1
O
F
F
L
H
W
S
l
P
R
E
V
T
R
S
H
U
T
O
T
2
P
S
/
M
N
A
O
P
L I
L
S
E
E
J
S
X
T
M
O
V
S
/
O
N
F
L
E
T
T
I
O
R
D
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
Set the AUDIO IN switches, both CH-1 and
CH-2, to INT.
N
N
T
O
H
I G
. L
B
D
C
L
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
S
N
A
O
S
R
T
C
A
H-1
A
U
D
I
N
C
H
-2
M
IC
+
48
M
IC
LIN
E
M
IC
+
48V
to AUDIO IN
4
Using External Inputs
External
microphone
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN switches CH-1 and
CH-2 to EXT.
Connect external audio sources to the
AUDIO IN connectors CH-1 and CH-2.
Cable clamp
3
Set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switches
CH-1 and CH-2 to LINE (line level:
+4 dBu).
3
4
Set the corresponding AUDIO IN
switch (CH-1 or CH-2) to EXT.
Set the corresponding LINE/MIC/+48V
switch (CH-1 or CH-2) according to the
connected microphone.
Using an External Microphone
You can use an external microphone for
recording, such as the ECM-673 Electret
Condenser Microphone.
MIC: For a microphone that requires no
power supply
MIC +48V: For a microphone that requires
+48V power supply (such as the ECM-
673)
1
Loosen the screw of the microphone
holder and open the cover.
Note
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
l
s
P
R
j
H
E
V
F
R
O
L D
E
S
V
T
Even when recording CH-1 for 2-channel
monaural by setting “EXT CH Select” of “Audio
“CH-1,” set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switch for
CH-2 to the same position as that for CH-1.
A
T
R
S
G
H
U
T
R
T
P
S
E
O
/
S
L
M
L
P
Y
A
N
A
C
/ P
I L
L
A
N
U
S
E
E
J
S
X
E
M
O
N
T
L / S
V
O
F
F
E
L
I T
T
W
O
R
D
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
N
T
H
G
I
L .
B
D
C
L
B
O
I
T I
S
T
N
O
H
S
-
C
H
-2
M
IC
L
IN
E
M
IC
+
4
8
M
V
IC
L
IN
E
M
IC
+
4
8
V
Adjusting the Audio Recording
Levels
2
Attach a microphone, close the
microphone holder cover for the
original condition to secure, then
connect the microphone cable to either
of the AUDIO IN connectors (CH-1 or
CH-2).
You can select automatic or manual adjustment
mode independently for each channel.
To adjust the levels automatically (AGC)
When the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and
CH-2 are set to AUTO, the audio recording levels
are automatically adjusted.
Recording Audio Signals
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
To adjust the levels manually
The built-in speaker is disabled in Camera mode.
Set the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and CH-
2 to MANUAL and adjust the audio recording
levels by turning the AUDIO LEVEL controls.
Set the controls to 5 for the reference setting (0
dB). Setting to 10 maximizes the level (+12 dB),
and setting to 0 minimizes it (–∞).
To adjust the audio monitoring volume
Use the MONITOR VOL buttons.
Pressing the + button increases the volume, and
pressing the – button decreases it. To muffle the
sound, set it to the minimum level.
The input levels are displayed on the screen when
you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.
While you adjust the volume, the level is
displayed as a bar on the screen.
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
When you perform fine adjustment using “TRIM
LEVEL controls to 5 and adjust the microphone
sensitivity so that the appropriate meter
indications are obtained.
Audio recording in special recording
modes
• No audio recording is made in Interval
Recording or Frame Recording.
• No audio recording is made in Slow & Quick
recording if the recording frame rate is set to a
value different from the playback frame rate.
Monitoring the Audio
You can monitor the sounds being recorded with
the headphones connected to the headphone
connector (stereo mini jack).
Headphone
connector
MONITOR VOL buttons
MONITOR
VOL
HDV/DV
L
M
O
N
VO IT
L
OR
THUM
NA
IL
R
SEL/SET
F
REV
CANCE
P
LA
Y
/P
L
AU
SE
F
FW
D
P
/
REV
ST
OP
NEXT
T
S
TA
REC
R
T/S
TOP
H
O
L
HOLD
FF
-2
CH
IN
O
DI
A
U
-1
CH
C
MI
8V
4
C+
MI
E
LIN
C
48V
MI
+
C
MI
E
LIN
A
R
T
N
S
O
H
A
N
O
I T
I O
S
T
N
B
O
L
F F
D C
B
L .
H
G
I
I N T T A B
A
I S
D
T
O
F
L
P
Y
/ C
S
R
A B
I G
R
B
L
R
M
A
T
H
C
D
A
R U D
T / U
C
T
I O
I T B -
N
T
S
/
T
A
S
U
R
V
E
I
C
W
V
R
/D
E
E
D
V
XP
H
A
C
E
N
D
S
E
F
D
O
U
M
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
O
F
M
E
F
M
S
S
R
T
T
A
A
O
S
R
E
T
P
L/
E
/
S
DI
IN
E
A
T
C
H
H
-1
A
M
U
TO
UA
P
P
IC
AN
T
U
R
R
E
E
L
O
A
IN
EX
T
F
IL
U
T
D
D
C
IO
LE
S
E
R
EL
C
T
COMPONENT
OUT
T
E
A
A
U
IN
C
D
C
S
E
IO
-2
A
M
U
TO
UA
AN
A
A/V OUT
L
I
N
OUT
T
T
EX
P
D
UT
W
-E
HDMI
O
X
1
R
HDMI
Y
BA
T
TER
E
EAS
REL
T
U
O
I
D
S
Recording Audio Signals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Outputting the Color
Bars and Reference
Tone
Recording Shot Marks
When you record shot marks for important scenes
of a clip recorded in HD Mode as subsidiary data,
you can access the marked points easily on a Shot
Mark screen, which only displays scenes with
shot marks only. This increases editing
efficiency.
The camcorder can output a color-bar signal in
place of the camera picture.
A 1-kHz reference tone is output with the color
The color-bar signal and reference-tone signal are
also fed out from the SDI OUT, COMPONENT
OUT, and A/V OUT connectors.
For the Shot Mark screen, see “Displaying the SHOT
The camcorder permits you to record two types of
shot marks: shot mark 1 and shot mark 2.
Shot marks can be recorded as needed during
recording or can be added after recording while
checking the playback pictures.
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
STATUS
BRIGHT DURATION
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
LCD B.LIGHT
ON
OFF
Note
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
Shot marks cannot be recorded for clips recorded
in SD Mode.
R
BARS/CAM button
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
E
O
T
S
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
Inserting a shot mark during recording
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
2
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
0
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
and use the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button.
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
E
L/S
P
F
IL
S&
E
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
XT
G
IN
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
U
E
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
INT
E
BA
D
E
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
SEL
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
PUSH SET
1
SHOTMARK
2
T
ZOOM
W
SHOTMARK 1 button
SHOTMARK 2 button
Press the BARS/CAM button.
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP
The camera picture is switched to color bars.
To return to the camera picture, press the button
again.
PREV
PLAY/PAUSE
NEXT
STOP
.
u
>
x
Press the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button where
you wish to insert a mark.
You can select the type of color bars with “Color
menu.
Multi: ARIB multiformat color bars
75%: Vertical stripes of 75% luminance
100%: Vertical stripes of 100% luminance
If the Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 function is
assigned to an assignable button, you can also use
A shot mark of the type corresponding to the
button you press is recorded.
Notes
• When recording of the camera image is in
progress, it cannot be switched to the color-bar
picture even if you press the BARS/CAM
button. (You can switch the color-bar picture to
the camera picture.)
For operations to add shot marks after recording,
• The color bar mode cannot be selected in Slow
& Quick Motion mode and EX Slow Shutter
mode.
Outputting the Color Bars and Reference Tone / Recording Shot Marks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
To add or delete the OK mark to or from clips
before the last one
Operate in Media mode
Adding the OK Mark
By adding the OK mark to a clip recorded in HD
Mode, you can prevent the clip from being
deleted or divided inadvertently.
The OK mark is also used to obtain a thumbnail
screen of only the marked clips (OK-Clip
thumbnail screen) when you press the
THUMBNAIL button.
For the OK-Clip thumbnail screen, see “Displaying
96.
Note
The OK mark cannot be added to clips recorded
in SD Mode.
To add the OK mark in Camera mode, assign the
OK Mark function to an assignable button.
For function assignment, see “Changing Functions
Adding the OK mark
In Camera mode, you can add the OK mark to the
last clip recorded on the SxS memory card
currently selected.
When recording of a clip ends, press the
assignable button to which you assigned the
OK Mark function.
The message “OK Mark” is displayed on the
screen for three seconds.
Deleting the OK mark
In Camera mode, you can delete the OK mark
added to the last clip on the SxS memory card
currently selected.
1
Press the assignable button to which
you assigned the OK Mark function.
The confirmation message “Execute/Cancel”
is displayed.
2
Select “Execute.”
The OK mark of the last clip is deleted.
Adding the OK Mark
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
segmented into multiple files because the file
size exceeded 2GB, only the last file is played.
• During Rec Review playback, the playback
control buttons other than the STOP button are
disabled.
Rec Review
• If the video format was changed after recording,
Rec Review cannot be performed (except when
the change was from SP 1440/24P to SP 1440/
60i).
You can review the last recorded clip on the
screen (Rec Review).
• The Setup and PICTURE PROFILE menus
cannot be operated during Rec Review.
R
E
L E
A
S
E
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
I E
W
E
R
C
F O C U S
E X P
A N D E D
REC REVIEW
button
O
F
F
L
H
W
T
S
l
P
j
R
E
F
H
O
V
R
E
L
s
D
V
A
T
S
H
U
T
R
T
G
T
R
O
P
/ S
E
P
S
/
A
L
M
T
C
L
Y
N
A
O
N
P
/
L
P
E
A
L I
X
U
T
J
S
E
S
E
M
O
N
L
V
F
E
S
/
L
O
HD
V/D
W
F
T
O
R
T
I
D
V
C
A
N
C
E
L
R
M
A
C
/
S
R
A B
O
F
Y
A
N
I
T
T
I
D
L
P
A B
S
S
U
T
A
T
S
N
O
/
T
I -
T
N
O
I
B
A
R
U D
T
U
/
H
G
I
C
T
L .
B
T
H
G
I
D C
L
D C
R
B
L
N
B
O
I
T
I
H
T
O
S
N
A
S
R
T
CH
A
-1
AU
DI
O
IN
C
O
O
U
M
T
PO
N
EN
T
CH
-2
A/
V
MIC
O
U
T
LI
N
R
E
E
E
L
A
S
MIC
+4
E
8V
M
IC
LIN
E
H
D
M
IC
M
+
48
I
O
U
T
V
S
T
O
S
T
P
A
R
T
/
R
E
V
E
I
R
W
E
C
F
E
X
O
C
P
BA
TT
ER
S
U
A
D N
E
R
Y
D
EL
EA
SE
SD
I
O
U
T
I R
I S
U
T
A
O
O
N
E
P
U
H S
Press the REC REVIEW button after
recording is finished.
You can assign the Rec Review function to an
Playback of the specified block of the clip begins.
In Rec Review, the last 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or
the entire part of the clip is displayed, depending
CAMERA SET menu. It is set to 3 seconds at the
factory.
Rec Review is terminated at the end of the clip,
resuming STBY (recording standby) status.
To interrupt Rec Review
Press the REC REVIEW or STOP button or the
assignable button to which you assigned the Rec
Review function.
Rec Review is canceled, resuming STBY
(recording standby) status.
Notes
• If the duration of the last recorded clip is less
than the time (3 or 10 seconds) specified for Rec
Review, the clip is played back from the
beginning to the end.
If the clip was recorded in SD Mode and
Rec Review
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
THERS
Al l Reset
era Data
e Zone
Clock Set
Language
Assign But ton
Tal l y
Changing Functions of
the Assignable Buttons
B
C
Ti
am
m
:
B
UTC +09:00
Engl i sh
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
:
:
:
:
Lens Info
BRT Disp
Histogram
Off
00:00
:
B
The camcorder has four assignable buttons to
which you can assign various functions for
convenience.
B
2
Select the button to which you wish to
assign a function.
ASSIGN 1 to 3 buttons
3
Select the function to be assigned.
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
ASSIGN
Function
Contents
1
2
3
Marker
All marker indications (safety-
zone marker, center marker,
aspect marker, guide frames) on/
off
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
V
L
O
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
Last Clip DEL Last clip delete
H
L
F
F
O
ATW
ATW function on/off
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ATW Hold
Rec Review
Rec
ATW Hold function on/off
Rec Review start/stop
Recording start/stop
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
.9
FO
5
2
1
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
IA
T
M
FF
D
N
E
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
F
IL
A
SS
R
O
P
O
4
2
E
T
ER
IG
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
C
O
L
6
.
CE
0
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
E
UR
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
P
ILE
S&
E
L/S
F
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
XT
G
IN
H
FU
MA
L
L
NUA
A
U
L
E
AUT
O
FF
TO
O
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
H
-1
A
U
N
-1
H
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
INT
E
BA
D
L
U
A
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
LE
B
LE
SE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
Picture Cache Picture Cache mode on/off
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Freeze Mix
Expanded
Focus
Freeze Mix start/stop
Expanded Focus function on/off
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
OFF ON
ASSIGN
4
Spotlight
Backlight
IR Remote
TLCS Spotlight mode on/off
TLCS Backlight mode on/off
IR Remote Commander enable/
disable
ASSIGN 4 button
The following functions are assigned at the
1)
1)
Shot mark 1 insert
Shot mark 2 insert
Shot Mark1
factory:
Shot Mark2
Fader
ASSIGN 1 button (LENS INFO)
Depth-of-field indication on/off
Fader on/off
EVF Mode
EVF screen mode (color/
monochrome) switching
Brightness level indication on/off
ASSIGN 2 button (BRT DISP)
Brightness-level indication on/off
BRT Disp
Histogram
Lens Info
Histogram indication on/off
Depth-of-Field indication on/off
OK Mark add/delete
ASSIGN 3 button (HISTOGRAM)
Histogram indication on/off
1)
OK Mark
ASSIGN 4 button
1)Valid in HD Mode only
No function is assigned (Off).
4
Exit the menu.
Changing Functions
The assigned functions can be viewed on the
Use “Assign Button” of the OTHERS menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “Assign Button” from the
OTHERS menu.
Changing Functions of the Assignable Buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Preparatory Settings
Interval Recording
Before starting Interval Recording, make the
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in
advance.
The Interval Recording (time-lapse recording)
function is especially effective for shooting
objects that move very slowly.
The specified number of frames are automatically
recorded at the specified intervals.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu.
Recording interval (Interval Time)
C
MF
C
A
M
A
E
R
A
SET
ssis t
olor ar Type
F l i cker Reduce
:
Of f
B
:
Mul t i
B
B
B
B
B
Z
Z
oo
oo
m
m
S
peed
00:00
Trans
Set t ing
Interval
:
:
Of f
1sec
1
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
T
i
me
m
m
Number of Fra
es :
2
3
4
Set “Setting” to “On.”
The camcorder enters Interval Recording
mode.
When the special recording mode indication
on the screen is active, “Interval Rec” flashes
on the screen.
Number of frames for one recording session
(Number of Frames)
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
Set the time between recordings with
“Interval Time.”
You can select the time from among 1 to10/
15/20/30/40/50 seconds, 1 to 10/15/20/30/
40/50 minutes, and 1 to 4/6/12/24 hours by
scrolling the display.
Notes
• Interval Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Picture
Cache Recording, or Slow & Quick Motion.
When you set Interval Recording to “On,”
Frame Recording, Picture Cache Recording and
Slow & Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”
• No audio recording is executed in Interval
Recording.
• Interval Recording cannot be performed if an
HD SP video format is selected with “Video
Format” and “i.LINK I/O” is set to “HDV” or
“DVCAM” with the OTHERS menu.
• Interval Recording cannot be performed if
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu is set to
SP 1440/24P.
Set the number of frames to be recorded
at a time with “Number of Frames.”
“HQ 1280/60P” or “HQ 1280/50P,” you can
select from among 2, 6, and 12 frames.
With other settings, you can select from
among 1, 3, 6, and 9 frames.
5
Exit the menu.
Performing Interval Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Interval Recording begins.
Interval Recording
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The flashing “Interval Rec” on the screen is now
steadily lit.
Frame Recording
Notes
• You cannot change the “Interval Time” and
“Number of Frames” settings while Interval
Recording is in progress. To change them,
pause recording.
• After starting Interval Recording, Rec Review
operation is disabled, even during an interval.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
The Frame Recording function is especially
effective for clay animation recording.
The specified number of frames are recorded
intermittently when you press the REC START/
STOP button.
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while
recording is halted in Interval Recording mode.
Notes
Stopping Interval Recording
• Frame Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Interval Recording, Picture
Cache Recording or Slow & Quick Motion.
When you set Frame Recording to “On,”
Interval Recording, Picture Cache Recording
and Slow & Quick Motion are forcibly set to
“Off.”
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Interval Recording stops.
To restart Interval Recording, press the button
again.
Canceling Interval Recording mode
• No audio recording is executed in Frame
Recording.
Set “Setting” of “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Off.”
• Frame Recording cannot be performed if an HD
SP video format is selected with “Video
Format” and “i.LINK I/O” is set to “HDV” or
“DVCAM” with the OTHERS menu.
• Frame Recording cannot be performed if
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu is set to
SP 1440/24P.
Note
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the
power switch to OFF, while the “Interval Time”
and “Number of Frames” settings are maintained.
Preparatory Settings
Before starting Frame Recording, make the
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in
advance.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “Frame Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu.
C
A
MER
A
SET
C
olor
B
ar Type
:
Mul t i
B
B
B
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce
Z
Z
oo
oo
m
m
S
peed
Trans
00:00
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
P. ache Rec
m
Set ting
ber of Fra
:
O
O
f f
n
C
N
u
m
m
es :
Frame Recording
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while
recording is paused in Frame Rec mode.
2
3
Set “Setting” to “On.”
The camcorder enters Frame Recording
mode.
When the special recording mode indication
on the screen is active, “Frame Rec” flashes
on the screen.
Stopping Frame Recording
Set “Setting” of “Frame Rec” of the
CAMERA SET menu to “Off.”
Select the “Number of Frames” value
for one recording session.
Recording stops and Frame Rec mode is
canceled.
You can select from among 2, 6, and 12 when
or 720/50P.
Note
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the
power switch to OFF, while the “Number of
Frames” setting is maintained.
With other video formats, you can select
from among 1, 3, 6, and 9.
4
Exit the menu.
Performing Frame Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
1
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording in Frame Rec mode begins.
The “Frame Rec” indication stops flashing.
When the number of frames you specified
with the menu are recorded, the camcorder
automatically enters FRM STBY (Frame Rec
Standby) status.
2
Press the REC START/STOP button
again.
Each time you press the REC START/STOP
button, the camcorder records the specified
number of frames then enters FRM STBY
status.
Notes
• Recording cannot be stopped until the specified
number of frames are recorded. If the power
switch is set to OFF during recording, the power
is only shut off after the specified number of
frames are recorded.
• The Rec Review function cannot be used while
recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress.
• You cannot change the “Number of Frames”
setting while recording in Frame Rec mode is in
progress. To change it, pause the recording.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
Frame Recording
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Picture Cache Recording is enabled and
the CACHE REC lamp lights.
Picture Cache Recording
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
When the Picture Cache function is active, the
camcorder stores the last few seconds of video
captured in the built-in cache memory to permit
you to start recording video on an SxS memory
card from a point before you press the REC
START/STOP button.
A
TR SH
AN OT
SI
TI
B
ON
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HIS
TO
GR
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
T
M
F
DIA
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
ER
O
T
ER
P
N
AM
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
10
5
AN
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
T
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
E
/SE
P
P
IL
S&
E
L
F
B
Q
S
R
O
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
XT
G
IN
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
TO
L
E
AU
O
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
DIO
AI
C
U
N
H
H-1
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
BA
D
L
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
P
A
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
The maximum picture cache time is 15 seconds.
CACHE REC
Notes
CACHE REC lamp
• Picture Cache Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
Recording, or Slow & Quick Motion. When you
set Picture Cache Recording to “On,” Frame
Recording, Interval Recording and Slow &
Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”
• The following operations set Picture Cache
Recording to “Off.”
—Setting Interval Recording to “On”
—Setting Frame Recording to “On”
—Setting Slow & Quick Motion to “On”
—Changing the recording format
The Setting On/Off operation can be
alternatively made by using an assignable
button if you assign the Picture Cache
function to the button.
For function assignment, see “Changing
3
4
Set the time to cache video with
“P.Cache Rec Time.”
• When Picture Cache Recording is “On,” the
time code is always recorded in Free Run mode
regardless of the TC/UB SET menu settings
You can select the time from among 0-2 sec,
2-4 sec, 4-6 sec, 6-8 sec, 8-10 sec, and 13-15
sec.
(The actual time to trace back to start
recording may vary within the selected time
range depending on conditions.)
Preparatory Settings
Exit the menu.
Before starting Picture Cache Recording, make
the necessary settings on the CAMERA SET
menu in advance.
The special recording/operation status indication
block on the screen shows “zCACHE.” (z in
green).
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Performing Picture Cache
Recording
1
Select “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu.
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
Starting Picture Cache Recording
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce
Z
Z
oo
oo
m
m
S
peed
Check that the CACHE REC lamp is lit and
press the REC START/STOP button.
Trans
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
P. ache Rec
S&Q Mot i on
00:00
m
Recording begins, and stored video in the cache
memory is written first to the SxS memory card.
The on-screen “zCACHE” indication changes
the color of z to red.
C
Set ting
P. Cache Rec Time: 2-4se
:
Of f
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”
Picture Cache Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Stopping Picture Cache Recording
Slow & Quick Motion
Recording
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Canceling Picture Cache function
Set “Setting” of “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Off” or press the assignable button
to which you assigned the Picture Cache function.
When the camcorder is in HD Mode and one of
you can set a frame rate for recording different
from that for playback:
Notes
NTSC Area
• If you change the recording format, the cached
data are cleared and caching is newly started.
Therefore, data cached before you changed the
format cannot be recorded if you start Picture
Cache Recording immediately after changing
the format.
HQ 1920/30P, HQ 1920/24P, HQ 1280/60P, HQ
1280/30P, HQ 1280/24P
PAL Area
HQ 1920/25P, HQ 1280/50P, HQ 1280/25P
• If you start/stop Picture Cache Recording
immediately after you insert an SxS memory
card, data may not be recorded on the card.
• Picture caching starts when you activate the
Picture Cache function. Therefore, video before
the function is activated cannot be recorded
with Picture Cache Recording.
By recording at a different frame rate, you can
obtain a smoother slow-motion or quick-motion
effect than with slow-speed or fast-speed
playback of a material recorded at the normal
recording speed.
Example
When the video format is HQ 1280/24P,
recording with a frame rate between 1 and 23 fps
provides a quick-motion effect in playback, and
recording with a frame rate between 25 and 60 fps
provides a slow-motion effect in playback.
• Picture Cache Recording is invalid for external
input signal (HDV).
• As picture caching is disabled while an SxS
memory card is being accessed, such as during
playback, Rec Review, or thumbnail screen
display, Picture Cache Recording of such a
period cannot be made.
• Although you can change the “P.Cache Rec
Time” setting on the menu even while recording
is in progress, any new value becomes valid in
such a case only after recording is stopped.
Notes
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be activated in
SD Mode.
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
Recording, or Picture Cache Recording. When
you set Slow & Quick Motion to “On,” Frame
Recording, Interval Recording, and Picture
Cache Recording are forcibly set to “Off.”
• No audio recording is made if the recording
frame rate is set to a value different from the
playback frame rate.
Preparatory Settings
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording,
make the necessary settings with the CAMERA
SET menu in advance.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
1
Select “S&Q Motion” from the
CAMERA SET menu.
Slow & Quick Motion Recording
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can change the recording frame rate with the
Direct menu by operating the joystick or the jog
dial.
C
A
M
m
m
E
R
S
A
SET
peed
Trans
B
B
B
B
B
B
:
Z
Z
oo
oo
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
P. ache Rec
S&Q Mot i on
Rec Review
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
m
00:00
C
O
n For
m
m
at
:
HQ1280/24P
3sec
Fra e Rate : 60
Recording in Slow & Quick Motion
Mode
2
Select the video for Slow & Quick
Motion recording with “On Format.”
Starting recording
3
Select the frame rate for recording with
“Frame Rate.”
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
The setting range varies depending on the
current video format.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
With a format of 1920 horizontal
resolution: 1 to 30 fps
With a format of 1280 horizontal
resolution: 1 to 60 fps
Slow & Quick Motion recording begins.
Recording is made with the video format (On
Format) and the frame rate (Frame Rate) set on
the S&Q Motion menu.
Notes
4
5
Exit the menu.
• You cannot change the On Format and Frame
Rate settings while Slow & Quick Motion
recording is in progress. To change them, pause
the recording.
Press the S&Q button.
S&Q button
S&Q
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode
62).
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Stopping recording
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
IG
E
R
O
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
E
P
IL
S&
E
L/S
F
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
Press the REC START/STOP button.
IN
T
T
G
IN
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
EX
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
DIO
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
Slow & Quick Motion recording stops.
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Note
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion
mode.
When the special recording mode indication on
the screen is active, “S&Q Motion” is displayed
on the screen.
When recording at a low-speed frame rate, it may
take time until recording stops after you press the
REC START/STOP button.
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
Press the S&Q button.
Setting the recording frame rate with the
Direct menu
Note
Slow & Quick Motion mode is automatically
canceled when you set the power switch to OFF,
while the “On Format” and “Frame Rate” settings
are maintained.
When the special recording mode indication on
the screen is active, [Recording frame rate]/
[Playback frame rate] fps is displayed under
“S&Q Motion.”
T
S&Q
STBY
TCG 00:00:00:00
1920/24P
H
Q
S&Q Motion
29/24fps
Slow & Quick Motion Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
• If the recorded picture and the current camera
picture differ in video format, the Freeze Mix
display cannot be achieved.
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used if the
recording video format is SP 1440/24P.
• The Freeze Mix display cannot be obtained in
Slow & Quick Motion mode or Slow Shutter
mode.
Freeze Mix: Image
Alignment
Using the Freeze Mix function, an image (still
picture) of a clip recorded in HD Mode can be
temporarily superimposed on the current camera
picture, permitting you to easily align images for
next recording.
• You cannot operate the Setup menus and
PICTURE PROFILE menu in Freeze Mix
status.
To use the Freeze Mix function
Assign the Freeze Mix function to one of the
assignable buttons.
For details, see “Changing Functions of the
Superimposing a Freeze Mix image
1
2
Stop recording to set the camcorder to
STBY (recording standby) status.
Press the REC REVIEW button to
review the recorded images, or press the
ASSIGN button to which you assigned
“Freeze Mix.”
3
Press the ASSIGN button to which you
assigned “Freeze Mix” at the image
with which you want align.
The image where you pressed the ASSIGN button
in step 3 is displayed as a still picture over the
current camera picture.
Canceling Freeze Mix status
You can cancel it with the ASSIGN button to
which you assigned “Freeze Mix” or the REC
START/STOP button.
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the ASSIGN button, the normal camera picture
is restored.
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the REC START/STOP button, normal
recording begins.
Notes
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used in SD
Mode.
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A button B button
Shot Transition
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
STATUS
BRIGHT DURATION
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
LCD B.LIGHT
The Shot Transition function helps you to easily
obtain complex picture effects by registering
camera settings or conditions as a “shot” to be
reproduced in a recording sequence.
ON
OFF
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
MODEbuttonand
indicator
Your settings for focus, zoom, iris, gain, shutter
speed, white balance, color matrix, and detail
level can be registered in combination in one shot,
and you can change the current camera settings to
those of the shot, or the settings reproduced from
one shot to those of another Shot, resulting in a
smooth transition of scenes.
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
S
T
A
TU
R
S
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
0
4
/CA
M
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
2
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
A
SS
E
R
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
E
.6
C
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
E
N
1
N
R
IL
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/S
P
S&
EL
F
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
G
IN
FU
H
MA
L
L
NU
AL
A
U
XT
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
INT
BA
D
L
A
U
SE
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
LE
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
For example, you can shift the focus from a closer
object to a farther object, or change the depth of
field by adjusting the iris. In addition, you can
develop scenes under different recording
conditions smoothly. If you register the manual
adjustment function for white balance, the scenes
will develop smoothly between objects indoors
and those outdoors.
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
A button and B button
You can register a Shot to each of the buttons.
MODE button and indicator
When you press this button, the camcorder enters
Shot Transition operation mode, and the indicator
of the button lights.
The shot transition operation area is displayed on
the screen.
Each time you press the button, the shot-transition
operation mode cycles among Store, Check,
Execute, and Off (normal Camera mode).
In Execute mode, the shot transition information
area appears.
Notes
• Shot transition cannot be activated in
combination with any of the EX Slow Shutter,
Interval Recording, Frame Recording, and Slow
& Quick Motion functions.
• If you wish to shift the focus in a shot transition,
MF mode is selected.
• If you wish to shift the zoom in a shot transition,
The zoom will not be shifted with the
MANUAL setting.
• If you register a focus position in a macro area
with the MACRO switch ON, the focus may not
be shifted to the registered position if a shot
transition is executed with the MACRO switch
set to OFF.
Shot-transition operation area
EC
TCG 00:00:00:00
Shot Transition
Execute
Shot-
Shot-
A
B
S
E
0s
Rec Link:
12s
ff
Shot-transition operation buttons and
indications
O
Shot-transition information area
For shot-transition operations, use the three
TRANSITION operation buttons on the upper
panel.
Note
Camera operations are disabled when the shot
transition operation mode is Check or Execute.
Shot Transition
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When adjustments are required, set the mode to
Time/Speed
Store.
Set whether to specify the duration of a
transition by time or by speed of zoom
transition.
Preparatory Settings
Setting Contents
Time
The “Transition Time” setting is valid.
The “Transition Speed” setting is
valid.
Before you start recording using the Shot
Transition function, make the necessary settings
with the CAMERA SET menu in advance.
The conditions you set are indicated in the shot
transition information area on the screen when
you set the shot-transition operation mode to
“Execute.”
Speed
Trans Curve
Select the transition pattern.
The corresponding icon is displayed in the
shot transition information area.
Shot-transition information area
Setting
and icon
Linear
Contents
Progress bar
To make the transition linearly.
S
E
12s
ff
Transition pattern
Transition time
0s
Rec Link:
P
O
T
Rec Link status
Start timer indication
Soft Trans
To make the transition slowly at
the beginning and end but linearly
in between.
Setting procedure
1
Select “Shot Transition” from the
CAMERA SET menu.
P
T
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
Soft Stop
To make the transition slowly near
the end.
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
Trans Time
Trans Speed
Time/Speed
Trans Curve
St art Timer
:
:
:
:
:
:
2sec
5
Speed
Soft Stop
Of f
S
lo
w
Shutter
00:00
A
:
:
Of f
P
B
T
ype
Mul t i Rec Link
Of f
2
Specify the conditions for a shot
transition.
T
P: Parameter level T: Transition of time
Trans Time
Start Timer
Set the time from start of recording to start of
the shot transition.
The countdown indication is displayed in the
shot-transition information area until the shot
transition is started by the Start Timer.
After you set “Time/Speed” to “Time,” set
the duration of a transition in the range of 2
to 15 sec in steps of 1 second.
Trans Speed
After you set “Time/Speed” to “Speed,” set
the zoom transition speed (specifying the
time to be taken for the zoom moving from
the TELE end to the WIDE end at a certain
speed).
Rec Link
Set whether to link shot-transition start and
target shot selection to recording start.
The setting status is displayed in the shot
transition information area.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. The larger
the number you set, the higher speed.
Shot Transition
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off: Not to link to recording start
Making a transition from the current
picture to a registered shot
(To use the A or B button to start the
transition and specify the target shot)
Shot-A: To start the transition to Shot A in
synchronization with recording start
Shot-B: To start the transition to Shot B in
synchronization with recording start
1
Adjust the camera settings to obtain an
image with which you wish to start
recording.
3
Exit the menu to finish the settings.
2
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Registering a shot
You can register two kinds of shots: A and B.
3
4
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins.
1
Press the MODE button to display
“Store” in the shot-transition operation
area.
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the
button of the target shot (A or B) when
you wish to start the shot transition.
2
3
Adjust the camera settings to obtain an
image you wish to register.
The current camera settings are gradually
shifted to those registered to the specified
shot.
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-A” or “Shot-
B,” the camcorder automatically performs
the shot transition to the camera settings
registered to Shot A or Shot B, respectively.
You need not press the button.
When adjustment is finished, press the
Shot A or Shot B button.
The camera settings are registered to the pressed
button.
The registered camera settings are maintained
until you register them next.
Notes
• You cannot return to the status in step 1 once
after you start the shot transition. If the status
must be resumed, register it as a shot.
Checking the Registered Settings (Shot)
1
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
• When you perform recording on an external
device connected via the i.LINK(HDV/DV)
connector in synchronization with REC
START/STOP operations on this camcorder,
recording start on the external device and shot-
transition start may not be synchronized even if
“Rec Link” has been set to “Shot-A” or “Shot-
B,” depending on the performance of the
external device.
2
Press the A or B button, whichever you
assigned to the shot you wish to check.
The selected shot (camera settings or conditions)
takes effect on the picture on the screen.
With this operation, you cannot check the
conditions of the transition.
Making a transition from Shot A to Shot B
When “Rec Link” is set to “Off” or “Shot-B,” a
shot transition from Shot A to Shot B is possible.
Recording with a Shot Transition
1
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Operations differ depending the “Rec Link”
setting.
2
Press the A button.
The picture is adjusted according to the
camera settings registered for Shot A.
Shot Transition
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel recording while a transition is in
progress
If you press the REC START/STOP button
during recording, the recording stops, even when
a shot transition is in progress.
3
4
5
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
The E-E picture of the settings where the
recording stops is displayed.
Recording begins with the camera settings
registered for Shot A.
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the B
button when you wish to start the shot
transition.
Releasing a Shot Transition
Press the MODE button so that the button
indicator goes dark.
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-B,” the
camcorder automatically performs the shot
transition to the camera settings registered
for Shot B. It is not necessary to press the B
button.
The LCD monitor/EVF screen resumes the
normal condition.
Making a transition from Shot B to Shot A
When “Rec Link” is set to “Off” or “Shot-A,” a
shot transition from Shot B to Shot A is possible.
1
2
3
4
5
Press the MODE button to display
“Check” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Press the B button.
The picture is adjusted according to the
camera settings registered for Shot B.
Press the MODE button to display
“Execute” in the shot-transition
operation area.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins with the camera settings
registered for Shot B.
When “Rec Link” is “Off,” press the A
button when you wish to start the shot
transition.
When “Rec Link” is “Shot-A,” the
camcorder automatically performs the shot
transition to the camera settings registered
for Shot A. It is not necessary to press the A
button.
Ending recording
When recording is completed, press the REC
START/STOP button.
Shot Transition
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fade In
Set this to “On” to start recording with fade
in.
(When you operate the function using an
assignable button, it is not necessary to set
“Fade In” to “On” with the menu.)
Fader Function
Using the Fader function, you can start a
recording by fading in a scene or end a recording
by fading out of a scene.
The fader function can be assigned to an
assignable button.
Fade In Type
Select the initial status of the fade-in.
White: To fade in from a white screen
Black: To fade in from a black screen
Fade In Time
Set the duration (1/2/3/5/10 sec) of fade-in.
For function assignment, see “Changing Functions
Notes
3
Specify the fade-out conditions.
• The fader function cannot be used in
combination with the Slow & Quick Motion,
Interval Recording, Frame Recording, or EX
Slow Shutter function.
Fade Out
Set this to “On” to end recording with fade
out.
(When you operate the function using an
assignable button, it is not necessary to set
“Fade Out” to “On” with the menu.)
• When a clip is recorded using the fade-in
function, a white or black screen becomes the
may be useful for easier identification.
• When you perform recording on an external
device connected via the i.LINK(HDV/DV)
connector in synchronization with REC
START/STOP operations on this camcorder,
recording start/stop on the external device and
fade-in start/fade-out end may not be
Fade Out Type
Select the final status of the fade-out.
White: To fade out to a white screen
Black: To fade out to a black screen
Fade Out Time
Set the duration (1/2/3/5/10 sec) of fade-out.
4
Exit the menu.
synchronized, depending on the performance of
the external device.
• If you set “Fade In” to “On” with the menu, the
camcorder enters Fade-in standby status when
you exit the menu.
• When the Fader indication on the screen is
active, the initial status (“White Fader” or
“Black Fader”) you set with “Fade In Type”
flashes.
Preparatory Settings
Specify the conditions to activate the Fader
function in advance with the following
procedure:
74%
1
Select “Fader” of the CAMERA SET
menu.
White Fader
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET
I n ter val Rec
Fra e Rec
ache Rec
ot i on
ND
1
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000CH1
CH2
++
B
B
B
B
m
Fade I n
Fade I n Type
Fade I n Ti
:
:
:
:
Of f
P.
S&Q
Rec Review
Fader
TLCS
C
Black
2sec
Of f
M
me
When using an assignable button
00:00
:
B
3sec Fade
Fade
O
O
O
ut
ut Type : Black
ut Ti e: 2sec
If you assigned the Fader function to an
assignable button, the Fade In/Fade Out On/Off
settings can be made using the button.
B
Fade
m
2
Specify the fade-in conditions.
Fader Function
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
For fading in a scene
Note
Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned
the Fader function in STBY (recording standby)
status.
The Fade In/Fade Out settings automatically
return to “Off” when you turn off the camcorder,
while the Type and Time settings set with the
menu are maintained.
The fade-in function is turned on.
For fading out
Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned
the Fader function during recording.
The camcorder enters in the fade-out standby
status.
Starting Recording with a Fade In
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins by fading in the camera picture.
When the fade-in process you specified is
completed, the camcorder enters Normal
Recording mode.
The Fade-In Type indication flashes during the
fade-in process and goes off when the process
ends.
Ending Recording with a Fade Out
• If you set “Fade Out” to “On” with the menu,
the camcorder automatically enters Fade-out
standby status when it is set to Recording mode.
• When you press the ASSIGN button to which
you assigned the Fader function after starting
recording, the camcorder enters fade-out
standby status.
Press the REC START/STOP button to
start fading out of the camera picture.
The fading-out process begins.
When the fading-out process you specified is
completed, recording simultaneously stops.
The Fade-Out Type indication flashes during the
fade-out process and goes off when the process
ends.
Canceling the Fader function
Set “Fade In” and “Fade Out” to “Off” with the
menu.
Or press the ASSIGN button again.
Fader Function
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P
I
CTURE PROFILE
OFF
SEL
SET
Picture Profiles
PP1: STANDARD
PP2: STANDARD
PP3: STANDARD
PP4: STANDARD
PP5: STANDARD
PP6: STANDARD
You can customize the picture quality, depending
on the conditions or circumstances of recording,
and store them as a picture profile, enabling the
picture quality to be resumed just by your
selecting the picture profile.
4
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SET” and make the settings of
the picture profile items.
Six different picture profiles (PP1 to PP6) can be
stored in memory.
P
I
CTURE PROF
I
LE
The same standard (reference) values are
registered to six picture profiles at the factory as
those specified for the Picture Profile Off status.
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is available for
picture-profile operations.
PP1: STANDARD
SEL
SET
Pro f i le Na
atrix
Color Correction
hi te
Detail
me
B
B
B
B
M
W
Note
The picture profiles can be operated only in
Camera mode. They cannot be operated in Media
mode.
For details on the setting items, see “Picture
5
When the settings are completed, press
the PICTURE PROFILE button to exit
the menu.
Registering the Customized
Settings as a Picture Profile
Selecting a Picture Profile
Power switch:
CAMERA
T
R
A
N
O
S
T
S
N
T
I
H
O
I
O
N
B
O
F
C
L
F
D
L
B
L .
B
G
I
A
H
T
T
T
D
I
N
I
S
F
L
P
O
A
Y
B
Selecting a Picture Profile using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu
A
R
B
S
R
C
/ C
G
I
D
R
A
H
M
T
D
C
U
R
T
A
T
T
U
/
O
I
/
N
B -
I
S
T
A
T
U
S
OFF
V
/D
V
D
H
CAMERA
MEDIA
M
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
M
O
F
E
R
F
M
Once you store a picture profile, you can call the
picture quality registered in the picture profile as
follows:
A
S
E
L
E
/S
D
IA
E
T
C
H
-
1
A
M
U
A
T
O
P
P
IC
O
T
U
N
R
U
A
R
E
E
L
T
N
A
IN
E
F
E
N
O
U
L
IL
T
T
D
D
P
M
T
IO
T
C
S
O
U
E
IN
C
O
X
E
OUT
C
A
U
IN
C
D
CMPOENT
H
IO
-2
A
U
T
U
T
O
O
/V
A
M
A
N
U
A/V
A
L
IN
OUT
PICTURE
PROFILE
T
T
E
X
P
D
T
U
W
I
O
-E
M
D
H
X
1
R
HMDI
1
Set the power switch to CAMERA to
turn the camcorder on in Camera
mode.
Y
ER
TT
BA
RE
E
AS
LE
PICTURE PROFILE
button
T
U
O
I
D
S
2
3
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
1
Set the power switch to CAMERA to
turn the camcorder on in Camera
mode.
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SEL” then the desired picture
profile from the list.
2
3
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
Operating the jog dial or the joystick,
select “SEL” from the PICTURE
PROFILE menu then select the picture
profile number (PP1 to PP6) to operate.
Picture Profiles
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
3
4
Specify the target picture profile.
Example:
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.
P
I
CTURE PROFILE
OFF
SEL
SET
Select “Execute.”
PP1: SceneA
PP2: SceneB
PP3: SceneC
PP4: SceneD
PP5: SceneE
PP6: SceneF
Copying begins.
When copying ends, the completion message is
displayed for three seconds, and the original
screen display is restored.
The camcorder is adjusted to the picture
quality specified by the selected Profile.
(If you select “OFF,” the camcorder will be
fixed at the standard picture quality, and no
picture adjustment is allowed.)
Resetting a Picture Profile
You can reset a selected picture profile to the
factory settings (standard status).
4
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button
to exit the menu.
1
Select the picture profile you wish to
reset by proceeding from step 1 to 3 of
Selecting a Picture Profile using the
Direct menu
2
3
Select “Reset” from “SET” of the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
The picture profile being selected is displayed
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO
button.
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.
Select “Execute.”
TLCS
.
Resetting begins.
7
∗
On
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30
oo
m
M
F
++
F1.9 18dB SHT:1/2000
ATW 4300K PP
1
ND1
When resetting ends, the completion message is
displayed for three seconds, and the original
screen display is restored.
You can select picture profiles with the Direct
menu by operating the joystick or the jog dial.
For details on the Direct menu, see “Direct Menu
Storing a Picture Profile on an SxS
Memory Card
A picture profile can be sent to and stored on an
SxS memory card as a file (filename:
PPDATA.SUF).
Copying the Settings of a Picture
Profile
Only one picture profile can be stored on the same
memory card. The stored picture profile can be
immediately reproduced by reading from the
memory card.
You can copy the settings of a selected picture
profile to another picture profile.
1
Select the source picture profile by
proceeding from step 1 to 3 of
Storing a Picture Profile
1
2
Set the power switch to CAMERA.
2
Select “Copy” from “SET” of the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
The camcorder is turned on in Camera mode.
The picture profile numbers are listed on the
screen.
Insert a recordable SxS memory card
into a slot.
Picture Profiles
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Confirm that the corresponding ACCESS
lamp is lit in green.
3
Select the picture profile for which the
picture profile is to be loaded from the
memory card.
3
Select the picture profile to be stored.
The selected picture profile number is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The selected picture profile number is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4
5
Select “SET” of the PICTURE
PROFILE menu.
4
5
Select “SET” of the PICTURE
PROFILE menu.
Select “Recall” of “PP Data.”
Select “Store” of “PP Data.”
The message “PP Data Recall Execute/
Cancel” is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
P
I
CTURE PROFILE
PP1: STANDARD
Black
SEL
SET
:
:
:
B
B
0
0
0
6
Select “Execute.”
Black
Low Key Sat
opy
PP
eset
Gamma
Loading of the picture profile from the
memory card begins.
C
D
ata
Store
ecall
R
R
When overwriting to the picture profile you
specified in step 3 ends, the completion message
is displayed for three seconds, and the loaded
settings are immediately reflected.
The message “PP Data Store Execute/
Cancel” is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Note
6
Select “Execute.”
After you start loading, do not remove the SxS
memory card until the completion message is
displayed.
Writing of the selected picture profile to the
memory card begins.
When writing ends, the completion message is
displayed for three seconds, and the original
screen display is restored.
Note
After you start writing, do not remove the SxS
memory card until the completion message is
displayed.
Loading a Picture Profile
1
2
Set the power switch to CAMERA.
The camcorder is turned on in Camera mode.
Insert the SxS memory card that
contains the picture profile to be loaded
into a slot.
Confirm that the corresponding ACCESS
lamp is lit in green.
Picture Profiles
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Picture Profile Items
The values when “Off” is selected at “SEL” of the PICTURE PROFILE menu are shown in bold face
(example: Standard).
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Profile name
Set the profile name in 8 characters at maximum.
Profile Name
Changing the picture profile
name
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabetics,
numerics 0 to 9, - (hyphen), _ (underscore) and
space.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to activate the color phase adjustment
function with matrix operations for the entire
picture.
Matrix
Adjusting the color phase
over the entire area with
matrix operations
Note
When this function is set to “Off,” Color Correction
is also set to “Off” in synchronization.
Select
Select the built-in preset matrix provided for
Standard /High SAT / FL
Light / Cinema
convenience.
Level
Adjust the color saturation for the entire picture
–99 to +99 ( 0)
area.
Phase
Adjust the hue for the entire picture area.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G
Finely adjust the color phase for the entire picture
–99 to +99 ( 0)
area by independently setting each of the factors.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to enable the color phase adjustment
for a specific area. (Simultaneous adjustment of
multiple areas is not allowed. You can adjust it for
one area only.)
Color Correction
Adjusting the color phase in
a specific area
1)
Execute to detect the color in the center of the
screen. The area centering around the detected
color of the range specified by “Target Width”
becomes the target area of Color Correction.
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
2)
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
Area Indication
target area of Color Correction.
On / Off
Target Phase
Manually adjust the center color for the target area
0 to 359 (130)
for Color Correction.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
overwritten by the Area Detection result. Perform
fine adjustment with this item as required.
Target Width
Set the width of color phase for the target area for
0 to 90 (40)
Color Correction.
Level
Set the saturation for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Phase
Adjust the hue for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Picture Profiles
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Offset White
Set to “On” to shift the conversion value for auto
White
On / Off
white balance in Memory A or B mode and that for
auto tracing white in ATW mode to a lower color
temperature or a higher color temperature.
Setting the white balance
offset and the color
temperature of the preset
white
Offset<A>
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the volume of the offset white (shifting
volumes) of the conversion value in Memory A,
Memory B, or ATW mode, respectively.
Offset<B>
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Offset<ATW>
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Preset White
Adjust the preset color temperature when Preset
2100 to 10000 (3200)
white balance mode is selected in steps of 100K.
Notes
• Except when the white balance is in Memory A
or B mode or when ATW is active, you cannot
confirm the result of changing the Offset White
and Offset settings on the screen.
• Except when Preset white balance mode is
selected, you cannot confirm the result of
changing the Preset White settings on the screen.
Setting
Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Detail
On / Off
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the picture in HD
Mode
Level
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the detail level.
Frequency
Set the center frequency of the details.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening
Adjust the noise-suppression level.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter
Limit the white details.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Black Limiter
Limit the black details.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
V DTL Creation
NAM / Y / G / G+R
Select the source signal to generate vertical details
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
–99 to +99 ( 0)
applied to the sections above the knee point).
Picture Profiles
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Setting Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
On / Off
Level
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Frequency
–99 to +99 ( 0)
SD Detail
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the picture in SD
Mode
Adjust the detail level.
Set the center frequency of the details.
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the noise-suppression level.
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter
Limit the white details.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Black Limiter
Limit the black details.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
V DTL Creation
NAM / Y / G / G+R
Select the source signal to generate vertical details
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
–99 to +99 ( 0)
applied to the sections above the knee point).
Picture Profiles
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Setting Set to “On” to enable the detail level adjustment for
On / Off
Skin Tone Detail
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the areas of a
specific color phase
specific color-phase areas.
The detail level is uniform over the entire picture
with the Off setting.
Level
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the skin-tone detail level.
1)
Execute to detect the color in the center of the
screen. The area centering around the detected
color becomes the target area for Skin Tone Detail
control.
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
2)
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
Area Indication
target area for Skin Tone Detail control.
On / Off
Saturation
Adjust the color (saturation) level for Skin Tone
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically returned to 0.
Phase
Adjust the center color-phase value for the target
0 to 359 (130)
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically changed to the value equivalent to
that of the detected color.
Width
Adjust the width of the color phase of the target
0 to 90 (40)
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, the Width
setting automatically returns to 40.
Setting
Set to “On” to compress the high-luminance area of
Knee
On / Off
the picture.
Adjusting the knee level
Note
Knee is fixed and cannot be changed in the
following cases:
• When Gamma is set to CINE1 to 4
• When the electronic shutter is in SLS mode
• When EX Slow Shutter is active
Auto Knee
On / Off
Set to “On” to automatically set the best knee
conditions according to the luminance level of the
picture.
With “Off” the knee conditions can be manually
adjusted independently of the luminance level of
the picture.
Point
Set the knee point when Auto Knee is “Off.”
50 to 109 (90)
Slope
Set the knee slope (volume of compression) when
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Auto Knee is “Off.”
Knee SAT Level
Adjust the knee saturation level for the area over
0 to 99 (50)
the knee point.
Picture Profiles
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Level Adjust the gamma compensation level.
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Gamma
Adjusting the gamma
compensation level and
selecting the gamma curve
3)
Select the type of reference curve for gamma
Select
compensation.
STD1 / STD2 / STD3 / STD4 /
CINE1 / CINE2 / CINE3 /
CINE4
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the master black level.
Black
Adjusting the black
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the level of black gamma function that
emphasizes only the dark areas of the picture to
clear the tones or on the contrary de-emphasizes it
to reduce noise.
Black Gamma
Adjusting the black gamma
level
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Adjust the level of the low key saturation to
heighten the colors only in the dark areas of the
picture or pale them to reduce noise.
Low Key SAT
Adjusting the low key
saturation
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to copy.
Copy
Copying a picture profile
Store
Recall
To store a picture profile on an SxS memory card.
PP Data
Writing/loading a picture
profile
To load a picture profile from an SxS memory card.
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset.
Reset
Resetting a picture profile
1)To execute “Area Detection”
3)Available gamma curves
STD1: This deemphasizes the contrast in dark areas
more than STD2 and emphasizes the contrast in
intermediate areas.
STD2: This deemphasizes the contrast in dark areas
more than STD3.
1. Select “Area Detection.”
A square marker that indicates the detection
area appears in the center of the screen, and
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed below.
STD3: Standard (factory setting)
STD4: This emphasizes the contrast in dark areas more
than STD3.
CINE1:This smoothes the contrast in darker areas and
accentuates gradation changes in brighter areas,
for a calm and quiet effect.
CINE2:This gives almost the same results as CINE1.
Select this when you wish to obtain 100% video
signals for editing or other purposes.
CINE3:This emphasizes the contrast between light and
dark more than CINE1 and CINE2, and also
accentuates gradation changes on the black side.
CINE4:This emphasizes the contrast in dark areas more
than CINE3. Contrast in dark areas is weaker
and contrast in bright areas is stronger than STD
curves.
2. Select “Execute.”
Color-phase detection in the marker area is
performed.
When detection successfully ends, a
completion message is displayed. Then the
screen is restored, on which the target area
for the Color Correction or Skin Tone Detail
adjustment is changed to the area centering
around the color detected by “Area
Detection,” and the Area Indication (zebra
pattern) appears.
If detection fails, an error message appears,
then the precious screen is restored.
2)The Area Indication setting is common to all picture
profiles PP1 to PP6.
Picture Profiles
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu
Deleting Clips
Deleting Clips Collectively
Using the Setup menu, you can delete the
recorded clips collectively from the SxS memory
card in the selected card slot.
In Camera mode, the Last Clip DEL function for
deleting the last recorded clip and the All Clips
DEL function for deleting all clips from an SxS
memory card are available.
1
2
3
Select “All Clips DEL” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
For clip deletion in Media mode, see “Deleting
Select “Execute.”
A confirmation message is displayed.
Deleting the Last Recorded Clip
Select “Execute” again.
Using the assignable button to which you
assigned the Last Clip DEL function or the Setup
menu, the last recorded clip is easily deleted.
All the clips are deleted from the memory
card.
Notes
To delete using the assignable button
• If the SxS memory card contains clips of both of
HD Mode and SD Mode, only the clips of the
currently selected mode are deleted.
• Clips with the OK mark applied cannot be
deleted.
Assign the Last Clip DEL function to one of the
1
2
Press the assignable button to which
you have assigned “Last Clip DEL.”
For details on the OK mark, see “Adding/Deleting
A confirmation message is displayed.
Operating the joystick or the jog dial,
select “Execute.”
The last recorded clip is deleted from the
memory card.
To delete using the Setup menu
1
Select “Last Clip DEL” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
O
THERS
i. LINK I/
O
ode
:
:
:
:
:
B
D
isable
Tr i gger
ountry
HD SD
Video For
l i p
For
M
Both
NTSC
HD
Ti t l e Pref i x
Nu ber et
Update
:
:
B
234_
0001
C
Area
m
S
/
M
ode
00:00
m
at
HQ 1080/60iB
Last
A l l
C
l i p DEL Execute
C
C
C
l i ps DEL Cancel
l i ps CPY
m
at
M
edia
A l l
2
3
Select “Execute.”
A confirmation message is displayed.
Select “Execute” again.
The last recorded clip is deleted from the
memory card.
Deleting Clips
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Notes
• If a setup file already exists on the memory card
you specified in Step 1, a message to confirm
whether to overwrite the file is displayed.
• If there is not sufficient space on the memory
card, an error message is displayed.
Storing/Retrieving the
Setting Data
You can store all the menu settings (including
picture profiles) as a setup file on an SxS memory
card.
By retrieving the stored setup file, the proper
setup condition can be immediately obtained.
For the setup file operations, use “Camera Data”
of the OTHERS menu.
Retrieving the Setup File
When you retrieve the stored setup file, the
camcorder settings are changed according to the
file.
Note
1
Insert the memory card on which you
stored the setup file into a card slot.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
Storing the Setup File
Only one setup file can be stored on one SxS
memory card.
2
3
4
Select “Camera Data” from the
OTHERS menu.
1
Insert a memory card on which you
wish to store the setup file to a card slot.
Select “Recall.”
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
Select “Execute.”
Reading of data from the memory card begins.
An in-progress message is displayed during data
reading. When the read-out is completed, a
completion message is displayed, indicating that
the camcorder settings have been changed
according to the setup file.
2
Select “Camera Data” from the
OTHERS menu.
O
THERS
B
B
Al l Reset
Ca era Data
m
Store
Time Zone
Clock Set
Language
:
B
UTC +09:00
Engl i sh
Recall
Resetting to the Standard Values
00:00
:
The current camcorder settings you made through
various menu and button operations can be
collectively returned to the standard statuses
(factory settings) by executing “All Reset” of the
OTHERS menu.
B
Assign Button
3
4
Select “Store.”
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.
Select “Execute.”
Writing of data to the memory card begins.
An in-progress message is displayed during
writing. When writing is completed, a completion
message is displayed.
Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Thumbnail Screens
Turning the camcorder on with the power switch
set to MEDIA sets it to Media mode, and the clips
recorded on the SxS memory card are displayed
as thumbnails on the screen. (If no clips are
recorded on the card, a no-clip message is
displayed.)
You can start playback from the clip selected on
the thumbnail screen.
The playback picture can be seen on the LCD
monitor/EVF and external monitors.
Note
Even if the SxS memory card contains clips of
both HD and SD Modes, the normal thumbnail
screen shows only clips of the mode being
selected at “HD/SD Mode” of the OTHERS menu
To display all recorded clips regardless of the
mode, switch the screen to the All-Clip thumbnail
playback from the All-Clip thumbnail screen.
For connection of external monitors, see
Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen
HD Mode
The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)
Current clip No./ Total number of clips
120
m
in
0011 /0300
Cursor
(yellow)
OK
OK
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 10:53
JAN 14:53
JAN 18:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 11:53
JAN 15:53
JAN 19:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 12 :53
JAN 16 :53
JAN 20 :53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 13 :53
OK
OK
OK
JAN 17 :53
8
OK
JAN 21 :53
01/ JAN /2009 10 :53 S
&
Q
Mot ion 29 /24fps TCR 00:00:00:00
1
7
( )
JPAN0011 1
HQ 1920 / 24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
2
3 4
5
6
The index frame images of the clips are displayed
as thumbnails.
The first frame is automatically specified as the
index frame of a clip when recorded. You can
107).
The recording date and starting time are displayed
below the index image of each clip. (The OK
mark symbol is displayed if the clip is marked.)
Data for the clip at the cursor are displayed in 1 to
8.
1. Date and starting time of recording
Thumbnail Screens
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Clip name
5. Recording video format
3. OK mark
6. Duration of the clip
7. Timecode
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.
Displayed only if the selected clip is marked OK
4. AV independent file icon
8. Special recording information
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (S&Q Motion, Interval Rec, or
Frame Rec), the mode is displayed.
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is
displayed to the right.
Displayed if the selected clip is an AV
independent file. This indicates that the clip is
an AV independent file, such as those added to
the memory card using a computer. Not all
operations and indications may be available for
such clips.
SD Mode
The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)
Current clip No./ Total number of clips
120
m
in
0011 /0300
JAN 13 :53
Cursor
(yellow)
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 10:53
JAN 14:53
JAN 18:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 11:53
JAN 15:53
JAN 19:53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 12 :53
JAN 16 :53
JAN 20 :53
01
01
01
/
/
/
JAN 17 :53
7
6
JAN 21 :53
01/ JAN / 2009 10 : 53 I nterval Rec
TCR 00:00:00:00
DUR 00:25:05:00
1
( )
JPAN0011 1 / 03
DVCAM30P SQ
2
3
4
5
partitions is displayed after the name, separated
with a slash.
The top frame images of the clips are displayed as
thumbnails.
The recording date and starting time are displayed
below the top frame image of each clip.
For the clips segmented into multiple files
because their file size exceeded 2GB, a
symbol is displayed.
3. AV independent file icon
Displayed if the selected clip is an AV
independent file. This indicates that the clip is
an AV independent file, such as those added to
the memory card using a computer. Not all
operations and indications may be available for
such clips.
You can check the segment files on the EXPAND
4. Recording video format
5. Duration of the clip
6. Timecode
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.
Data for the clip at the cursor are displayed in 1 to
7.
1. Date and starting time of recording
2. Clip name
Only if the selected clip is a segmented one as
its file size is over 2GB, the number of
7. Special recording information
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (Interval Rec or Frame Rec),
the mode is displayed.
Thumbnail Screens
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
check whether the card contains any clips of
another mode than that currently selected.
In HD Mode, pressing the THUMBNAIL button
with the OK-Clip thumbnail screen displayed
displays the All-Clip thumbnail screen.
Changing the Type of Thumbnail
Screen
The type of thumbnail screen can be changed by
pressing the THUMBNAIL button.
In SD Mode, pressing the THUMBNAIL button
with the normal thumbnail screen displayed
displays the All-Clip thumbnail screen.
L
R
MONITOR
VOL
Note
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
You cannot start recording from the All-Clip
thumbnail screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button again to return to
the normal thumbnail screen, and playback and
clip operations are enabled.
THUMBNAIL button
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
/
H
P
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
AN OT
SI
TI
B
Switching the SxS memory cards
ON
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
F
IL
A
SS
IG
R
O
O
4
2
E
T
ER
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch memory cards.
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
C
IN
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
S&
E
L/S
FILE
B
Q
S
O
PR
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
CT
D
AK
IN
T
T
G
IN
EX
H
FU
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
H
-1
A
U
N
-1
H
C
IN
W
L
M
H
HIT
-EX1R
W
PD
E
IO
INT
BA
D
L
U
SE
A
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
LE
E
B
LE
O
VE
T
AN
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
Note
In Media mode, card switching is enabled only
when the thumbnail screen is displayed or when
an external input picture is displayed by pressing
the STOP button.
You cannot switch memory cards during
playback.
In HD Mode
Each time you press the button, the normal
thumbnail screen, OK-Clip thumbnail screen, and
All-Clip thumbnail screen are cyclically
displayed.
Continuous playback of cards in slots A and B is
not possible.
In SD Mode
Each time you press the button, the normal
thumbnail screen and All-Clip thumbnail screen
are alternately displayed.
Displaying the OK-Clip thumbnail screen
(HD Mode)
The OK-Clip thumbnail screen shows only the
clips marked OK among the clips on the current
SxS memory card.
Pressing the THUMBNAIL button with the
normal thumbnail screen displayed displays the
OK-Clip thumbnail screen.
For operations of the OK mark in Camera mode, see
For operations of the OK mark in Media mode, see
Displaying the All-Clip thumbnail screen
The All-Clip thumbnail screen shows all clips
both of HD and SD Modes recorded on the
current SxS memory card, permitting you to
Thumbnail Screens
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The clips after the selected clips are played back
in sequence.
When playback of the last clip ends, the
camcorder enters PAUSE (still picture) mode at
the last frame of the last clip.
Playing Back Clips
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
For playback operations, use the playback control
buttons on the handle.
Notes
• The playback picture may be momentarily
distorted or frozen between clips. The playback
control buttons and THUMBNAIL button do
not function during this condition.
• When you select a clip on the thumbnail screen
and start playback, the playback picture at the
beginning of the clip may be distorted. To start
playback without distortion, once pause
playback after starting it, press the PREV button
to return to the top of the clip, then restart
playback.
MONITOR
VOL
Joystick
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
PLAY/PAUSE
button
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD
F FWD button
j
PREV
l
G
/S
J
F REV button
PREV button
STOP button
STOP
NEXT
L
NEXT button
s
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
IL
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
E
O
T
S
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
Information displayed on the playback
screen
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
5
2
1.9
B
RT
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
F
IL
A
SS
R
O
O
4
2
E
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
0
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
E
N
1
N
R
FIL
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
/S
PIC
S&
EL
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
S
E
A
LE
D
PE
AK
IN
CT
G
T
T
IN
H
FU
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
EX
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
H
-1
A
U
N
-1
H
C
IN
W
EX1R
-
L
M
H
HIT
E
BA
DIO
LE
INT
E
L
U
SE
A
T
T
AU
C
X
PMW
DIO
The following information is superimposed on
B
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
the playback picture.
1
120min
2
B PLAY
3
4
5
• When the IR Remote Commander is enabled,
you can use its playback control buttons instead
TCR 00:00:00:00
0011/03 00
• Functions of the playback control buttons are
98).
• The jog dial is also valid when you move the
cursor on the thumbnail screen or proceed to the
next step of operations.
PRV
x 4
CH1
CH2
NXT
6
7
Playing Back the Selected and
Subsequent Clips in Sequence
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
2. Playback mode
1
Operating the joystick or jog dial, move
the cursor to the thumbnail image of the
clip with which you wish to start
playback.
3. SxS memory card in use
A
mark appears if the memory card is write-
protected.
4. Time data
The time data for the playback picture are
displayed. Each time you press the TC/U-BIT/
DURATION button, the indication is switched
between timecode (TCR) and user-bit (UB)
data.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
selected clip.
Playing Back Clips
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Clip no./total number of clips on the
memory card
Monitoring Audio
6. Joystick operation guidance area
The functions assigned to the joystick in the
current condition are displayed.
In Normal playback mode, you can monitor the
recorded audio signals through the built-in
speaker or connected headphones.
Display example (Playback mode):
Headphone
connector
Function when tilted up (toward the subject)
MONITOR VOL buttons
MONITOR
VOL
PRV
Function
when tilted
to the right
Function
when tilted
to the left
HDV/DV
x 4
L
M
O
NI
VO TO
L
THU
R
MN
AIL
R
SEL
/S
F
R
ET
EV
C
P
AN
CE
LA
Y
/P
AU
L
SE
F
FW
P
/
RE
D
V
NXT
S
TO
P
N
EXT
T
S
TA
R
EC
T/S
R
TOP
H
L
HOLD
O
FF
-2
CH
IN
O
DI
A
U
-1
CH
Function when tilted down (toward the EVF)
C
MI
8V
4
C+
MI
E
LIN
C
48V
MI
+
C
MI
E
LIN
R
T
A
O
S
T
N
A
N
T
I
I O
O
H
S
N
B
O
L
F F
D C
. L
B
T T A B
I
D
T
H
T
G
I
I N
Y
P S
O
A B
S
R
F
A
L
B
C
/
I G
D
R
L
R
M
A
C
R U D
B -
C
T
I O
/
T
A
T
I
U
/
N
S
T
A
T
S
U
R
V
E
I
C
W
V
R
/D
E
E
D
V
XP
H
A
C
E
N
D
S
E
F
D
O
U
M
Guide marks Functions
E
N
U
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
O
F
M
E
F
M
S
T
R
A
A
O
S
R
E
T
P
L/
E
/
S
DI
IN
S
T
E
A
T
C
H
H
-1
A
M
U
TO
P
P
IC
AN
T
U
UA
R
R
E
E
L
O
A
IN
EX
T
F
IL
M
High-speed playback in
forward direction (×4, ×15,
×24)
U
D
T
D
C
IO
LE
ENT
MPON
OUT
S
E
R
EL
C
T
CO
T
E
A
A
U
C
D
C
S
E
IO
-2
IN
A
M
U
TO
UA
T
AN
A
A
/
V
O
U
L
I
N
OUT
T
T
EX
P
D
UT
O
W
-E
MI
HD
X
1
R
HMDI
Y
TER
BA
T
E
EAS
REL
T
U
O
I
D
S
m
High-speed playback in reverse
direction (×4, ×15, ×24)
Normal playback
Built-in speaker
With the headphones connected to the headphone
jack, the built-in speaker is turned off.
Press the MONITOR VOL buttons to adjust the
sound volume.
B
X
Pause
PRV
Jump to the top of the current
clip
The level bar is displayed during adjustment.
You can select audio channel(s) to be monitored
SET menu.
NXT
Jump to the top of the next clip
7. Audio levels
The audio levels in recording are displayed.
Pausing the playback
Switching to High-Speed Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The playback is restarted by pressing the button
again.
The camcorder permits you to play clips at 4
times, 15 times or 24 times normal speed in the
forward or reverse direction. Audio is muffled in
15-time or 24-time high-speed playback.
Stopping playback
You can stop playback with either of the
following operations:
To play at a high speed in the forward direction
Press the F FWD button.
Each time you press the button, the playback
speed switches among 4 times, 15 times and 24-
times normal speed.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
Playback mode is canceled, restoring the
thumbnail screen.
To play at a high speed in the reverse direction
Press the F REV button.
Each time you press the button, the playback
speed switches between 4 times, 15 times and 24
times normal speed.
Press the STOP button.
Playback mode is canceled, showing any external
input or a blue screen.
To display the thumbnail screen, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
To return to normal playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playing Back Clips
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cueing Up
To return to the top of the current clip
Press the PREV button.
• When you press the button in normal or fast-
forward playback, the top of the current clip is
cued up then playback begins.
• When you press the button in fast-reverse
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the
current clip is cued up, then the still picture is
displayed.
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the
previous clips one by one.
To start playback from the top of the first clip
Press the PREV button and F REV button
simultaneously. The top of the first-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
To jump to the top of the next clip
Press the NEXT button.
• When you press the button in normal or fast-
forward playback, the top of the next clip is
cued up then playback begins.
• When you press the button in fast-reverse
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the next
clip is cued up, then the still picture is displayed.
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the
subsequent clips one by one.
To start playback from the top of the last clip
Press the F FWD button and NEXT button
simultaneously. The top of the last-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
Adding Shot Marks During
Playback (HD Mode)
In the same manner as in recording, you can add
shot marks to the clip during playback.
At the point where you wish to add a shot
mark, press the “Shot Mark1” or “Shot
Mark2” assigned button, or the
SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button on the IR
Remote Commander.
Notes
• No shot mark can be added if the memory card
is write-protected.
• No shot mark can be added to the first or last
frame of a clip.
Playing Back Clips
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
Clip Operations
In Media mode, you can operate the clips or
confirm and change the subsidiary data for clips
using the Clip Operation menus.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu pops up
on the screens as shown below.
Clip Operation Menus
Thumbnail screen (page 101)
Still picture in Pause mode (page 101)
CANCEL
CANCEL
DISP CLIP INFO
OK MARK ADD
OK MARK DEL
COPY CLIP
DISP CLIP INFO
OK MARK ADD
SHOT MARK1 ADD
SHOT MARK2 ADD
EXPAND CLIP
DELETE CLIP
SHOT MARK
SHOT MARK1
SHOT MARK2
EXPAND CLIP
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 106)
SHOT MARK screen (page 107)
CANCEL
CANCEL
EXPAND (COARSE)
EXPAND (FINE)
PAUSE
PAUSE
SET INDEX PIC
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP
SET INDEX PIC
SHOT MARK1 ADD
SHOT MARK2 ADD
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP
Note
Selectable menu items are limited in SD Mode.
Clip Operations
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
SHOT
Function
Basic Operations of the Clip
Operation Menus
To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 2 recorded
1)
MARK2
EXPAND CLIP To display the EXPAND CLIP
Displaying a Clip Operation menu
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Clip Operation menu for the current display
pops up.
1)Effective in HD Mode only. You cannot select in SD
Mode.
Clip Operation menu in Pause mode
Selecting a Clip Operation menu item
Pressing the joystick or the jog dial with a still
picture displayed in Pause mode calls the Clip
Operation menu for the clip in Pause mode.
Turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick to select a
menu item then press the jog dial or the joystick.
Pressing the CANCEL button restores the
previous condition.
Selecting “CANCEL” from a Clip Operation
menu turns the Clip Operation menu off.
Item
Function
DISP CLIP INFO To display the CLIP INFO screen
for the clip (page 102)
OK MARK
To add the OK mark to the clip
1)
Notes
ADD
• When the SxS memory card is write-protected,
you cannot copy/delete/divide clips, change the
index frames, and add/delete the OK and shot
marks.
• There may be items that cannot be selected
depending on the status when the menu is
displayed.
1)
ADD
1)
ADD
EXPAND CLIP To display the EXPAND CLIP
1)Effective in HD Mode only. You cannot select in SD
Mode.
Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail
screen
Pressing the joystick or the jog dial with the
Clip Operation menu for the clip at the cursor.
Item
Function
DISP CLIP
To display the CLIP INFO screen for
INFO
the clip (page 102)
OK MARK
To add the OK mark to the clip (page
1)
ADD
OK MARK
To delete the OK mark from the clip
1)
DELETE
COPY CLIP
To copy the clip to another SxS
1)
To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 1 and/or shot
mark 2 recorded (page 106)
SHOT MARK
SHOT
To display thumbnails only of the
frames with shot mark 1 recorded
1)
MARK1
Clip Operations
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip
When you select “DISP CLIP INFO” from a Clip Operation menu, the CLIP INFO screen appears.
HD Mode
120
m
in
CLIP I NFO
0011/0300
4
( )
JPAN0011 1 OK
01 / JAN/2009 10:53
HQ 1920 /24p
5
6
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
S
&Q
Motion 29/24fps
TCR 00:05:00:02
TCR 00:05:00:00 STR
TCR 00:08:19:23 END
DUR 00:03:20:00
CH1/CH2
2
3
PREV CLIP
NEXT CLIP
SD Mode
120
m
in
CLIP I NFO
0011/0300
4
( )
JPAN0011 1 /03
01 / JAN/2009 10:53
1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DVCAM30P SQ
I nterval Rec
TCR 00:00:00:00
TCR 00:00:00:00 STR
TCR 00:25:05:00 END
DUR 00:25:05:00
CH1/CH2
2
3
PREV CLIP
NEXT CLIP
1. Image of the current clip
6. Date and starting time of recording
2. Image of the previous clip
Press the PREV button to switch to the CLIP
7. Recording format
8. Special recording information
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode, S&Q Motion (HD Mode only),
Interval Rec, or Frame Rec, the mode is
displayed.
INFO screen of the previous clip.
3. Image of the next clip
Press the NEXT button to switch to the CLIP
INFO screen of the next clip.
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is
displayed to the right.
4. Clip name
In SD Mode, the number of partitions is
displayed after the name only if the selected clip
is a segmented one because its file size is
over 2GB.
9. Timecode of the displayed frame
10. Timecode at the recording starting point
11. Timecode at the recording ending point
12. Duration of the clip
5. OK mark (HD Mode only)
Displayed only when the selected clip is
marked OK.
13. Recorded audio channels
Clip Operations
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
clip name.
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark to/
from a Clip (HD Mode Only)
The parenthetical number is the minimum value
that does not exist in the destination memory
card.
By adding the OK mark to clips, you can obtain a
thumbnail screen of only the marked clips when
you press the THUMBNAIL button.
Clips with the OK mark cannot be deleted or
divided. To delete or divide the clip, remove the
OK mark.
Examples:
ABCD0002(1) if ABCD0002 exists
ABCD0002(2) if ABCD0002(1) exists
ABCD0005(4) if ABCD0005(3) exists
• If parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist
as the result of repeated copying, copying to
that card cannot be done any more.
• A warning message is displayed if there is not
sufficient space on the destination SxS memory
card. Replace the SxS memory card with one
with sufficient space.
Adding the OK mark
1
Select “OK MARK ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The CLIP INFO screen for the clip appears
and a confirmation message appears below
the index frame.
Copying a specified clip
You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen to another SxS memory card.
2
Select “Execute,” and press the jog dial
or the joystick.
1
On the thumbnail screen of the current
memory card, select the clip you wish to
copy then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
The OK mark is applied to the selected clip.
Deleting the OK mark
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail
screen pops up.
For a clip already marked with OK, the Clip
Operation menu of the thumbnail screen permits
you to select “OK MARK DEL.”
2
3
Select “COPY CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
1
Select “OK MARK DEL” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen of the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
The information screen for the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
To copy, select “Execute” then press the
jog dial or the joystick.
2
To delete, select “Execute” then press
the jog dial or the joystick.
Copying begins.
The OK mark is deleted from the selected clip.
An execution message and an in-progress bar are
displayed during copying.
When copying ends, the thumbnail screen is
restored.
Copying Clips
You can copy clips on an SxS memory card to
another SxS memory card.
Each clip is copied with the same name to the
destination SxS memory card.
To cancel copying on the way
Press the CANCEL button.
Copying is canceled and the thumbnail screen is
restored.
Notes
Copying clips collectively
• If there is another clip having the same name on
the destination SxS memory card, the clip is
copied under a name adding a single-digit
number in parentheses to the end of the original
By using the Setup menu, you can copy clips on
an SxS memory card collectively to another SxS
memory card.
Clip Operations
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the memory card contains clips of both HD and
SD Mode, only the clips of the currently selected
mode are copied. This may be convenient when
you wish to extract clips of the same mode only.
Deleting Clips
You can delete clips from the SxS memory card.
Note
1
Press the MENU button when the
normal thumbnail screen is displayed
or in the Stop status.
An HD-mode clip marked OK cannot be deleted.
2
Select “All Clips CPY” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
Deleting a specified clip
You can delete a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen.
O
THERS
i. LINK I/
Tr i gger
ountry
HD SD
Video For
l i p
For
O
:
:
:
:
:
B
B
D
isable
M
ode
Both
NTSC
HD
Ti t l e Pref i x
Nu ber et
Update
:
:
B
234_
0001
C
A
rea
m
S
1
2
3
Select the clip you wish to delete on the
thumbnail screen then press the
joystick or the jog dial.
/
Mode
m
00:00
at
HQ 1080/60i Last
C
l i p DEL
C
A l l
A l l
C
C
l i ps DEL
l i ps CPY
A
B
A
m
at
M
edia
B
B
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail
screen pops up.
3
4
Specify the direction of copying.
Select “DELETE CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
A g B: To copy from the card in slot A to that
in slot B
The information screen for the selected clip
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the index frame image.
B g A: To copy from the card in slot B to that
in slot A
A confirmation message is displayed.
To delete, select “Execute” then press
the jog dial or the joystick.
All Clips Copy?
A
=
B
>
The clip is deleted.
Execute
ancel
C
The subsequent clips are shifted by one on the
thumbnail screen.
Select “Execute.”
Copying begins.
Deleting clips collectively
By using the Setup menu, you can delete clips
The status of progress is displayed during
from an SxS memory card collectively.
copying.
In HD Mode, only the clips of HD Mode are
copied.
Notes
• If the memory card contains clips of both HD
and SD Mode, only the clips of the currently
selected mode are deleted.
In SD Mode, only the clips of SD Mode are
copied.
To cancel copying in progress
Press the CANCEL button.
• HD-mode clips marked OK are not deleted.
Copying is canceled, and the OTHERS menu
screen is restored.
1
Press the MENU button when the
normal thumbnail screen is displayed
or in the Stop status.
When copying is completed
The completion message displayed. When the
OTHERS menu screen is restored, press the
MENU button to exit Menu mode.
2
3
Select “All Clips DEL” from “Clip” of
the OTHERS menu.
Select “Execute.”
A confirmation message is displayed.
Clip Operations
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Select “Execute” again.
EXPAND CLIP screen in HD Mode
Deleting begins.
In HD Mode, thumbnail images of the first frames
of 12 blocks equal in duration of a clip are
displayed on the EXPAND CLIP screen.
On the EXPAND CLIP screen in HD mode
displayed by using the Clip Operation menu in
Pause mode, the clip is displayed with the finest
possible partitions.
The status of progress is displayed during
deleting.
In HD Mode, only the clips of HD Mode are
deleted.
In SD Mode, only the clips of SD Mode are
deleted.
To cancel deleting in progress
Press the CANCEL button.
Deleting is canceled, and the OTHERS menu
screen is restored.
Current frame number
120
m
in
EXPAND CLIP
01 : 10 :30 :00
01 : 11 :10 :00
01 : 11 :50 :00
0000123
01:10:20:00
01:11:00:00
01:11:40:00
01 :10 :40 : 00
01 :11 :20 : 00
01 :12 :00 : 00
01 :10 :50 :00
When deleting is completed
The completion message displayed. When the
OTHERS menu screen is restored, press the
MENU button to exit Menu mode.
S1
S2
01 :11 :30 :00
01 :12 : 10 :00
S2
S1
01 /JAN/2009 10:53
S
&
Q
Mot i on 29 /24fps TCR 01:10:20:00
( )
JPAN0011
1
HQ 1920 /24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP
Screen
1
2
In HD Mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen permits
you to divide a clip into 12 blocks of equal
duration and show a thumbnail image of the first
frame of each block on the screen.
In SD Mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen shows
the thumbnail images of the first frames of the
segment files only for a clip segmented because
its file size exceeded 2GB.
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the normal thumbnail screen:
1. Frame information
The following icons show the marking for the
frame at the cursor.
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
scene in a clip of long duration.
Index frame
You can display the EXPAND CLIP screen by
selecting the clip on the thumbnail screen or on
the still picture of the clip in Pause mode.
Frame with shot mark 1 added
S1
Frame with shot mark 2 added
S2
1
Pause the playback or select a clip on
the thumbnail screen then press the
joystick or the jog dial.
The same icons may also be displayed below the
thumbnail image of each frame. If the frame has
multiple markings, one of the icons is displayed,
in the priority order of index frame, shot mark 1,
and shot mark 2.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu
pops up.
2. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor is
displayed.
2
Select “EXPAND CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The EXPAND CLIP screen appears for the
clip in Pause mode or that you selected on the
thumbnail screen.
EXPAND CLIP screen in SD Mode
In SD Mode, the thumbnail images of the first
frames of segment files are displayed for a clip
segmented because its file size exceeded 2GB on
the EXPAND CLIP screen.
Clip Operations
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
SHOT MARK2
DEL
Function
To delete shot mark 2 from the
selected frame (page 107)
Current segmentation file number
120m
in
EXPAND CLIP
0000001
DIVIDE CLIP
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 108)
00 : 00 : 00 : 00
00 : 09 : 30 : 00
00:19:00:00
SD Mode
You can select “PAUSE” only on the EXPAND
CLIP screen in SD Mode.
01/JAN /2009 10:53
JPAN0011 _01
TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
DUR 00 : 09 : 30 : 00
DVCAM30P SQ
Displaying the SHOT MARK
Screen (HD Mode Only)
1
2
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the normal thumbnail screen:
When one or more shot marks are recorded for a
single clip in HD Mode, the SHOT MARK screen
permits you to display only the marked frames as
the thumbnail images on the screen.
1. Timecode indication
1
2
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen.
The timecode of the segmentation file at the
cursor is displayed.
Press the joystick or the jog dial.
2. Duration
The duration of the segmentation file at the
cursor is displayed.
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
3
Select “SHOT MARK,” “SHOT
MARK1,” or “SHOT MARK2.”
Clip Operation menu on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
SHOT MARK: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 1
and/or shot mark 2 recorded
HD Mode
SHOT MARK1: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 1
SHOT MARK2: To display thumbnails only
of the frames marked with shot mark 2
When you select a frame on the EXPAND CLIP
screen and press the joystick or the jog dial, the
Clip Operation menu pops up to enable further
operations.
Item
Function
To decrease the number of
partitions of the clip
SHOT MARK screen example
EXPAND
(COARSE)
EXPAND
(FINE)
To increase the number of
partitions of the clip
120
m
in
SHOT MARK
01 : 10 :30 :00
01 : 11 :10 :00
- - -
0031/ 0031
PAUSE
To set to Pause mode at the
selected frame
S1
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
01 :10 : 50 :00
01:10:20:00
01:11:00:00
- - -
01 :10 :40 : 00
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for
- - -
- - -
- - -
the index frame of the clip (page
SHOT MARK1
ADD
To add shot mark 1 to the selected
frame (page 107)
- - -
01 /JAN/2009 10:53
S
&
Q
Motion 29 /24fps TCR 01:12:00:00
( )
JPAN0011
1
HQ 1920 /24p
DUR 00:03:19:23
SHOT MARK2
ADD
To add shot mark 2 to the selected
frame (page 107)
1
SHOT MARK1
DEL
To delete shot mark 1 from the
selected frame (page 107)
The detailed information of the clip is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the EXPAND CLIP screen:
Clip Operations
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor on the
SHOT MARK screen is displayed.
screen then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Clip Operation menu on the SHOT MARK
screen
2
3
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or
“SHOT MARK2 ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
When you select a frame on the SHOT MARK
screen and press the joystick or the jog dial, the
Clip Operation menu pops up to permit you
further operations.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
Item
Function
Select “Execute.”
PAUSE
To set to Pause mode at the selected
frame
Deleting a shot mark
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for the
index frame of the clip (page 107)
You can delete shot marks on the EXPAND CLIP
SHOT MARK1 To delete the shot mark 1 from the
DEL
selected frame (page 107)
SHOT MARK2 To delete the shot mark 2 from the
DEL
selected frame (page 107)
1
2
3
Select a frame from which you wish to
delete the shot mark on the EXPAND
CLIP screen or the SHOT MARK
screen then press the joystick or the jog
dial.
DIVIDE CLIP
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 108)
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (HD
Mode Only)
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Select the “SHOT MARK1 DEL” or
“SHOT MARK2 DEL” from the Clip
Operation menu.
In HD Mode, you can add shot marks to the clips
after recording or delete the recorded shot marks.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
Adding a shot mark in Pause mode
1
Pause the playback at the frame to
which you wish to add a shot mark then
press the joystick or the jog dial.
Select “Execute.”
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Changing the Index Frame (HD
Mode Only)
2
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or
“SHOT MARK2 ADD” from the Clip
Operation menu.
In HD Mode, you can change the index frame of
a clip to another frame you selected on the
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
1
Select a frame to be the index frame on
the EXPAND CLIP screen or the SHOT
MARK screen then press the joystick or
the jog dial.
3
Select “Execute.”
Adding a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
2
Select “SET INDEX PIC” from the Clip
Operation menu.
1
Select the frame to which you wish to
add a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
Clip Operations
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information screen of the selected frame
appears and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
3
Select “Execute.”
Note
Even if you specify a frame other than the top
frame for the index frame, playback always
begins from the top frame when you start it from
the thumbnail screen.
Dividing a Clip (HD Mode Only)
In HD Mode, you can divide a clip into two
different clips at the frame you select on the
1
2
3
Select the frame at which the clip is to
be divided on the EXPAND CLIP
screen or the SHOT MARK screen then
press the joystick or the jog dial.
The Clip Operation menu pops up.
Select “DIVIDE CLIP” from the Clip
Operation menu.
The information screen for the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message is
displayed below the image.
Select “Execute.”
The selected and subsequent frames are
divided, creating two clips having different
names.
The first 4 characters of the original clip name are
carried on, continuing to the last number on the
memory card by the second 4 numerics.
Example: If you divide a clip named ABCD0002
into two clips under the condition where a
new clip will be named EFGH0100, clip
ABCD0100 and clip ABCD0101 are created.
Note
If the remaining space on the memory card is
insufficient for divided clips, a message
informing you of it appears.
Clip Operations
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Displays
Showing the Status Screens
This camcorder provides status screens of five
kinds in Camera mode and four kinds in Media
mode, permitting you to check the various
settings and statuses of this unit.
Switching the status screens
Operating the joystick or the jog dial switches the
screens in sequence.
The status screens can also be displayed on an
external monitor.
Canceling the status screen display
For connections of an external monitor, see
Press the STATUS button again. The status
screen display is canceled.
Available status screens
• CAMERA status screen (displayed only in
Camera mode) (page 110)
STATUS button
LCD
TC/U-BIT/
STATUS
BRIGHT DURATION
A
B
SHOT
TRANSITION
LCD B.LIGHT
ON
OFF
DISPLAY BARS/CAM
BATT INFO
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
U
A
/P
IL
A
T
X
N
M
Y
LA
P
E
N
U
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
E
O
T
S
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
BR CD
HT
D
LC
IG
D
B.
TC
LIG
HT
U
R
A
-
B
I
ON
TI T/
ON
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
FO
2
5
1.9
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
AU
TO
A
N
U
4
F
IL
A
SS
E
R
O
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
ET
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
P
P
ILE
S&
E
L/S
F
B
Q
S
RO
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
T
FU
H
MANU
AL
L
L
AU
EX
AU
O
FF
TO
TO
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
EX1R
L
M
H
HIT
-
E
IO
INT
E
BA
D
E
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
DIO
L
PMW
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
L
R
MONITOR
VOL
MENU
CANCEL
S&Q
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
SEL/SET
Joystick
Jog dial
Activating the status screen display
Press the STATUS button.
Showing the Status Screens
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zebra: Zebra status
Display Contents
CAMERA Status Screen
1
This indication becomes “On” if you turn
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “1”
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of
the LCD/VF SET menu. The setting value
of “Zebra1 Level” of the LCD/VF SET
menu is displayed at the right.
The settings and statuses related to image
shooting are displayed.
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “2” is
selected for “Zebra Select.”
The CAMERA status screen is obtained only in
Camera mode. It is not displayed in Media mode.
2
This indication becomes “On” if you turn
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “2”
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of
the LCD/VF SET menu.
CA
W
M
ERA
1/5
hite Bal B: 12000K
A : 4700K
Gain L : 0dB
M: 9dB
PRST
:
3200K
H: 18dB
H
andle
Z
oo
m
S
peed H: 70
Zebra1:
O
O
n
f f
70%
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “1” is
selected for “Zebra Select.”
L: 30
2:
Skin Tone
D
etai l :
O
f f
Pict ure Prof i l e
:
PP1 STANDARD
Skin Tone Detail: Skin-tone detail status
The current status (On or Off) of “Setting” of
“Skin Tone Detail” of the PICTURE PROFILE
menu is displayed.
White Bal: White balance status
Display Contents
B
The color temperature stored in white
memory B is indicated. The color
Picture Profile: Picture Profile selection status
The selected Picture Profile number and name are
displayed. (If Picture Profile is off, “Off” is
displayed.)
temperature of white memory B is detected/
stored when you execute the auto white
balance operation in Memory B mode.
The color temperature stored in white
memory A is indicated. The color
temperature of white memory A is
detected/stored when you execute the auto
white balance operation in Memory A
mode.
A
PRST
The color temperature set as the preset
white is indicated. The color temperature of
preset white can be changed using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
Gain: GAIN switch settings
The gain values of the positions L, M, and H of
the GAIN switch assigned with the CAMERA
SET menu are displayed.
Handle Zoom Speed: Handle zoom speed
settings
The speed values assigned to the on-handle
ZOOM button on the CAMERA SET menu are
displayed.
Display Contents
H
Speed obtained when the speed switch is
set to the H position
L
Speed obtained when the speed switch is
set to the L position
CAMERA Status Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
In Media Mode
AUDIO Status Screen
AUDIO
1/4
CH-3
CH-4
oo
-40
-30
-20
-
10
0
OVER
Information regarding audio signals is displayed.
The display configuration varies between Camera
mode and Media mode.
O
utput
C
H
:
:
:
CH-3/CH-4
CH-3/CH-4
CH-3+CH-4
Headphones
peaker
S
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
The playback audio levels of CH-1/CH-2 or CH-
3/CH-4 are displayed according to the “Output
CH” setting of the AUDIO SET menu.
If audio input is fed in via the i.LINK connector
in STOP status or in external input recording, the
input audio levels are indicated. In this case, the
channel indications at the left of the meters are
CH-1 and CH-2 regardless of the “Output CH”
setting of the AUDIO SET menu.
In Camera Mode
AUDIO
CH-1
2/5
CH-2
oo
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
OVER
W
ind Fi l ter CH-1:
CH-2:
O
O
n
n
AGC Link: Linked
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
In other conditions, the meters do not function.
CH-1/CH-2: Audio level meters
Output CH: Output channel setting
The “Output CH” setting of the AUDIO SET
menu is displayed.
The levels of the CH-1 and CH-2 audio inputs (E-
E audio levels) are displayed.
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings
The current settings of “Wind Filter CH-1” and
“Wind Filter CH-2” of the AUDIO SET menu are
displayed.
Headphones: Headphone output
The output audio channel(s) for the headphones
is(are) displayed. The “Monitor CH” setting of
the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.
AGC Link: AGC link status
Speaker: Speaker output
The “AGC Link” status (Linked or Separate) of
The output audio channel(s) for the built-in
speaker is(are) displayed. As the speaker is
monaural, the outputs are CH-1+CH2 or CH-
3+CH4 even in stereo mode.
With nonstereo settings, the “Monitor CH”
setting of the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.
the AUDIO SET menu is displayed.
INT/EXT–CH-1/CH-2: Audio input settings
The inputs to CH-1 and CH-2 according to the
“EXT CH Select” setting of the AUDIO SET
menu and the AUDIO IN switch status are
displayed.
AUDIO IN EXT CH Display
switch
Select
CH-1: INT
CH-2: INT
—
INT-L
INT-R
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT
CH-2: INT
—
—
EXT-1
INT-R
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: INT
CH-2: EXT
INT-L
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT CH-1/CH-2
CH-2: EXT
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
CH-1: EXT CH-1
CH-2: EXT
EXT-1
EXT-2
CH-1
CH-2
AUDIO Status Screen
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO Status Screen
BUTTON/REMOTE Status
Screen
The information on video formats and settings for
the COMPONENT OUT, SDI OUT, HDMI
OUT, A/V OUT and i.LINK connectors is
displayed.
The functions assigned to the assignable buttons
and the status of the IR Remote Commander are
displayed.
BUTTON/RE
M
OTE
4/5
Assign But ton 1: Freeze
M
ix
VIDEO
Video For
Rec ode
utput
A/V ut
onver ter
NK I /
3/5
2:
3:
O
O
ff
ff
m
at
:
:
:
:
:
:
1920/60i
HQ
1920/60i
M
4: Rec Rev iew
O
S
elect
O
O
ff
I R Rem
ote
:
On
D
o
w
n
C
Squeeze
Disable
i .
L
I
O
Assign Button: Assignable button statuses
Video Format: Video format setting
The video format set in “Video Format” of the
OTHERS menu is displayed.
The functions assigned with the “Assign Button”
of the OTHERS menu to the respective
assignable buttons are displayed.
In HD Mode, the horizontal resolution, frame
rate, and scan format are displayed.
In SD Mode, the frame rate, scan format, and
aspect (SQ/EC) are displayed.
IR Remote: IR Remote Commander status
The status (On: enabled, Off: disabled) of the IR
Remote Commander is displayed
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate (HD Mode only)
The bit rate (HQ or SP) of the video format set in
“Video Format” of the OTHERS menu is
displayed.
Output Select: Component and digital output
status
The video format of the signal being fed from the
COMPONENT OUT, SDI OUT, and HDMI
OUT connectors according to the “Output Select”
setting of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
Video Out: Output status of the A/V OUT
connector
The format (NTSC or PAL) of the analog
composite signal being fed from the A/V OUT
connector is displayed when “Output Select” of
the VIDEO SET menu is set to “Composite.”
When the “Output Select” setting is other than
“Composite,” “Off” is displayed.
Down Converter: Down-converter setting of the
SD output (HD Mode only)
The “Down Converter” setting (Squeeze, Edge
Crop, Letterbox) of the VIDEO SET menu is
displayed.
i.LINK I/O: i.LINK I/O status
The i.LINK I/O setting (HDV/DVCAM/Disable)
of the OTHERS menu is displayed.
VIDEO Status Screen / BUTTON/REMOTE Status Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
BATTERY/MEDIA Status
Screen
The information on the battery pack and SxS
memory cards is displayed.
BATTERY/
Bat tery
MEDIA
5/5
Charge
C
ount 55
HDD
HDD
A
B
0
0
50
50
100
100
%
%
M
M
edia
edia
A
B
20
50
m
m
in
in
Li fe 100
Li fe 10
%
%
Battery: Battery charge remaining
The remaining charge level of the mounted
battery pack is displayed.
Charge Count: Repeated charge times
The number of times that the mounted battery
pack has been charged is displayed.
HDD A/HDD B: Battery remaining of PHU-60K/
120K/120R units
When PHU-60K/120K/120R Professional Hard
Disk units are connected, the remaining power
levels of the batteries of the PHU-60K/120K/
120R units connected via the respective card slots
are displayed.
Media A/Media B: Remaining space, available
recording time, and estimated service life
(rewriting limit)
The remaining space of the SxS memory cards in
the respective card slots is indicated on the
meters.
At the right, the available time for recording if
done at the current bit rate is displayed, in
minutes.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SxS
memory card or an invalid card is in the slot.
If the card is write-protected, a
icon is shown
to the right of the time indication.
The Life value is displayed only for an SxS
memory card which supports the life value
indication. It indicates the estimated remaining
usable period of the card (virgin status as 100%).
If an alarm is generated, make a backup of the
card as soon as possible and replace it with a new
card.
BATTERY/MEDIA Status Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Overview of the Setup Menus
This camcorder permits you to make various
settings for recording and playback with Setup
menus on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Setup Menu Layers
The Setup menus can also be displayed on an
external monitor.
MENU
CAMERA SET
Gain Setup
For connections of an external monitor, see
Shutter
EX Slow Shutter
Shot Transition
MF Assist
Setup Menu Configuration
Color Bar Type
Flicker Reduce
Zoom Speed
Zoom Trans
Interval Rec
Frame Rec
The following menu icons are displayed when
you press the MENU button, permitting you to
select the corresponding menus.
CAMERA SET menu
P.Cache Rec
S&Q Motion
Rec Review
Fader
For setting the items related to recording other
The picture-quality items are set with the PICTURE
TLCS
AUDIO SET menu
Shockless White
White Switch<B>
ATW Speed
Wide Conversion
Steady Shot
Image Inversion
VIDEO SET menu
For setting the items related to video outputs
LCD/VF SET menu
For setting the items related to the displays on the
AUDIO SET
VIDEO SET
Audio Input
Audio Output
00:00
Output Select
TC/UB SET menu
YPbPr/Digital Out Display
Video Out Display
Setup
For setting the items related to timecodes and user
OTHERS menu
Down Converter
24P System
LCD/VF SET
LCD
EVF
Peaking
Marker
Zebra
Display On/Off
(continues)
Overview of the Setup Menus
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TC/UB SET
OTHERS
Timecode
Users Bit
TC Format
Basic Menu Operations
All Reset
Camera Data
Time Zone
Clock Set
This section covers basic operations for setting
the Setup menu items.
Language
Assign Button
Tally
Menu controls
Hours Meter
IR Remote
Battery Alarm
Battery INFO
Direct Menu
i.LINK I/O
Joystick
MENU button
Jog dial
CANCEL button
L
R
MONITOR
VOL
MENU
CANCEL
S&Q
THUMBNAIL SEL/SET CANCEL
Trigger Mode
Country
SEL/SET
HD/SD Mode
Video Format
Clip
CANCEL
button
R
L
E
C
N
A
C
R
O
IT
L
T
E
/S
D
N
O
L
O
V
L
FW
F
M
E
S
E
S
IL
U
A
A
T
X
N
/P
M
Y
E
N
U
LA
P
/
H
T
V
E
P
TO
R
F
S
V
P
O
T
S
E
R
C
R
P
E
R
T/
A
T
S
D
L
O
T
H
H
L
F
F
O
Format Media
Version Up
Version
A
TR SH
SI
AN OT
TI
ON
B
L
IG
BR CD
HT
LC
D
B.
TC
LIG
D
HT
URA -BIT
/U
ON
ON
TI
/
ST
R
A
T
US
81.2
DI
BA SP
IN
T
T
L
A
Y
FO BA
RS
/C
AM
40
IR
IS
LE
N
S
IN
.9
FO
5
1
B
RT
2
D
IS
P
HI
ST
OG
R
AM
0
3
.8
2
0
1
F
IA
T
M
F
D
N
AN
O
A
E
UA
1
M
E
T
L
ND
U
AU
TO
N
O
4
F
IL
2
A
SS
E
R
O
T
ER
IG
P
N
A
M
5
1
MA
C
M
5
CR
3
O
O
L
C
6
.
CE
1
N
5
A
C
T
2
U
V
/
O
0
3
A
1
8
.
8
IN
C
O
D
5
FF
O
U
E
N
1
N
R
E
U
M
T
T
I
FOCUS
1
A
IC
/SE
P
ILE
S&
E
L
F
B
Q
S
RO
P
M
ZE
G
S
LOT
C
BR
A
SE
LE
PE
AK
IN
CT
D
G
IN
T
FU
H
MAN
L
L
UA
A
U
XT
L
E
AU
O
TO
TO
FF
T
O
A
U
AL
U
N
A
M
IO
D
AI
C
-1
U
N
H
H
A
-1
C
IN
W
EX1R
-
L
M
H
HIT
E
IO
E
INT
E
BA
D
L
L
A
U
T
T
AU
C
X
PMW
DIO
B
SE
LE
O
VE
T
A
L
A
U
L
A
PA
U
ST
AN
M
-2
CH
H
-2
C
O
PE
N
CA
CH
E
RE
C
MENU button
To turn Menu mode to use Setup menus on/off.
Joystick (SEL/SET button)
When you tilt it, the cursor moves in the
corresponding direction, permitting you to select
menu items or setting values.
Jog dial (SEL/SET dial)
When you turn the dial, the cursor moves up or
down, permitting you to select menu items or
setting values.
CANCEL button
To return to the previous layer of the menu. An
uncompleted change is canceled.
Displaying the Setup menu
Press the MENU button.
The menu icons appear on the screen.
The cursor is displayed on the icon of the menu
used last, and the corresponding menu item
selection area is displayed to the right.
Basic Menu Operations
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example: When the cursor is located at
(CAMERA SET menu icon)
CA
ME
RA
SET
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
Menu icon
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
Shutter
00:00
CA
ME
R
A
SET
A
:
:
Of f
Mul t i
B
T
ype
B
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
Shutter
Displayed when there are more
menu items beneath. (v shown at
the top indicates that there are
more menu items above.)
00:00
A
Of f
Mul t i
B
T
ype
:
Menu item selection area
Menu item selection area
• A B symbol is displayed to the right of any item
Note
that has subitems.
• The current setting value is displayed to the
right of an item that has no subitems.
When the camcorder is in EXPAND FOCUS
operated. Press the EXPAND FOCUS button to
release the mode.
• To return to the previous layer, select
or
tilt the joystick to the left.
3
Turn the jog dial or tilt the joystick
Setting the Setup menus
back or forth to set the cursor to the
menu item you wish to set then press the
dial or the joystick to proceed.
1
Rotate the jog dial or tilt the joystick
back or forth to set the cursor to the
icon of the menu you wish to set.
The setting area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the top of its subitems.
The selectable menu items are displayed in
the menu item selection area to the right of
the icon.
CA
ME
RA
SET
2
Press the jog dial or the joystick.
B
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup
Shu t ter
Low
Mid
High
:
:
:
0dB
9dB
18dB
The cursor moves to the menu item selection
area.
You can also move the cursor to the menu
item selection area by tilting the joystick to
the right.
• The menu item selection area can show 7
lines at maximum. When all the selectable
items cannot be displayed at one time, you
can scroll the display up or down by
moving the cursor.
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
S
hutter
00:00
A
Of f
Mul t i
B
T
ype
:
Setting area
• The subitems and their current values are
displayed.
• To return to the previous layer, select
the joystick to the left, or press the CANCEL
, tilt
button.
A triangle appears at the upper or lower
right corner of the menu item selection area
to indicate that scrolling is enabled.
When you select an item that has no subitems
and to be only On /Off or switched, the
choices are displayed to the right of the item.
In this case, proceed to step 5.
Basic Menu Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
For an item that requires your confirmation
When you select an item that you must confirm
before execution in step 3, the menu display
temporarily disappears, and a confirmation
message is displayed. Following the instructions
of message, specify whether to execute or cancel.
Example
CA
ME
R
A
SET
B
B
B
B
Gain Setup
Shut ter
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
Shutter
00:00
On
Of f
i
A
:
:
Entering a character string
B
Type
When you select an item for which a character
string, such as a time value or filename, is to be
specified, the input area for the character string is
highlighted, and “SET” appears at the right end.
Choices
4
For the item that has subitems, turn the
jog dial or tilt the joystick back or forth
to set the cursor to the subitem you wish
to set then press the dial or the joystick
to proceed.
1
Select characters by turning the jog dial
or tilting the joystick back and forth
then press the dial or joystick to
proceed.
The available values of the selected subitems
are displayed, and the cursor moves to the
current value.
The cursor moves to the next column.
To return to the previous column, tilt the
joystick to the left.
C
A
MERA
SET
18dB
12dB
9dB
6dB
3dB
B
B
B
B
2
3
Perform setting in the same manner up
to the last column/digit.
Gain Setup
Shut ter
Low
Mid
High
:
:
EX
Shot Transi t ion
MF ssis t
Color ar
S
lo
w
S
hutter
00:00
The cursor moves to “SET.”
A
:
:
Of f
Mul t i
0dB
-3dB
B
T
ype
Press the jog dial or the joystick.
The setting is completed.
Available value area
• The available value area can show 7 lines at
maximum. When all the selectable values
cannot be displayed at one time, you can
scroll the display up or down by moving the
cursor.
Terminating the menu operation
Press the MENU button.
The normal camera picture is resumed.
A triangle appears at the upper or lower
right corner of the available value area to
indicate that scrolling is enabled.
• For items having a wide range of available
values (example: –99 to +99), the available
value area is not displayed. The current
setting is highlighted instead, indicating
that the setting is ready for change.
5
Select the desired value by turning the
jog dial or tilting the joystick back or
forth then press the dial or the joystick
to make the setting.
The setting is changed, and the new setting is
displayed.
When you select “Execute” for an execution
item, the corresponding function is executed.
Basic Menu Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
Setup Menu List
The functions and available settings of menus are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: Speed).
The items marked with [M] in the Menu items column cannot be set in Media mode.
CAMERA SET Menu
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Low Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the L
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
Mid
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
High
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 / 18 dB
Mode
Speed / Angle / ECS / SLS
Gain Setup
Assigning gain
levels to the three
GAIN switch
positions
position.
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the M
position.
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the H
position.
Select modes of the Electronic Shutter.
Shutter
Specifying
operating
Shutter Speed
Set the shutter speed when Speed mode is selected.
conditions of the
electrical shutter
(unselectablewhen
“Setting” of “EX
Shutter” is “On”)
1/100
The available setting values vary depending on the video
Shutter Angle
180º / 90º / 45º / 22.5º / 11.25º
Set the shutter angle when Angle mode is selected.
ECS Frequency
Set the ECS frequency when ECS mode is selected.
60.02
The available setting values vary depending on the frame rate
of the video format selected.
SLS Frame
2 to 8 (Off)
Set the number of frames to accumulate when SLS mode is
selected.
(Off): For S&Q Motion or the SP 24P format (The setting
cannot be changed.)
Setting
Turn EX Slow Shutter mode on/off.
EX Slow
On / Off
Shutter
Setting the
Number of Frames
Set the number of frames to accumulate.
Supersensitized
Slow Shutter mode
16 / 32 / 64
Setup Menu List
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Trans Time Set the time it takes to make a shot transition.
2 to 15 sec (4 sec)
Shot
Transition
Setting the
operating
Trans Speed
Set the speed of the transition.
1 to 10 (5)
conditions of Shot
Transition
Time / Speed
Time / Speed
Determine whether to specify the transition by time or speed.
Select the transition pattern.
Trans Curve
Linear / Soft Trans / Soft Stop Linear: To make the transition linearly
Soft Trans: To make the transition slowly at the beginning and
end, but linearly in between
Soft Stop: To make the transition slow down near the end
Start Timer
Off / 5 sec / 10 sec / 20 sec
Rec Link
Off / Shot-A / Shot-B
Set the waiting time until the shot transition begins.
Set the function to start a shot transition linked to recording
start.
Off: To start the transition using a button without linked to
recording start
Shot-A: To start a transition to Shot-A linked to recording
start
Shot-B: To start a transition to Shot-B linked to recording
start
On / Off
Set to “On” to precisely adjust the focus automatically after
you roughly adjust it manually.
MF Assist
Turning the MF
Assist Function
on/off
Multi / 75% / 100%
Select the type of color bars displayed when you press the
BARS/CAM button.
Multi: To output multiformat color bars
75%: To output 75% color bars
Color Bar Type
Selecting the types
of color bar
100%: To output 100% color bars
Mode
Auto / On / Off
Set the operation of the Flicker-Reduction function.
On: To always activate it
Auto: To automatically activate it when flicker is detected.
Off: To not activate it
Flicker Reduce
Setting Flicker
Compensation
Frequency
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Set to the power supply frequency of the light source causing
flicker.
60 Hz: UC model
50 Hz: Other models
High
8 to 99 (70)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
on-handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to
H.
Zoom Speed
Setting the zoom
speed
Low
8 to 99 (30)
Remote
8 to 99 (50)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
on-handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to L.
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
ZOOM button of the IR Remote Commander.
Note
If the infrared line from the Remote Commander is not
received properly, zooming may not operate smoothly.
Setup Menu List
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Linear / Soft Set the operation mode at the beginning and end of zooming
Zoom Trans
Setting the zoom
operation mode
with the on-handle ZOOM button.
Setting
On / Off
Turn the Interval Recording function on/off.
Set the interval of recording in Interval Recording.
Interval Rec
Setting the Interval
Recording
Interval Time
function
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min
1 to 4/6/12/24 hour
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Interval
Recording.
2 / 6 /12 (HQ 1280/60P,
HQ 1280/50P)
Setting
On / Off
Turn the Frame Recording function on/off.
Frame Rec
Setting the Frame
Recording
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Frame
Recording.
function
2 / 6 /12 (HQ 1280/60P,
HQ 1280/50P)
Setting
On / Off
Turn the Picture Cache Recording function on/off.
P.Cache Rec
Setting the Picture
Cache Recording
function
P.Cache Rec TIme
0-2sec / 2-4sec / 4-6sec /
6-8sec / 8-10sec /13-15rec
Set the time to cache video in the picture cache memory (the
time to a point where recording is to start when you press the
REC START/STOP button in Picture Cache Recording.
On Format
Set the recording video format in Slow & Quick Motion
recording.
S&Q Motion
Setting the S&Q
Motion function
Country: NTSC Area
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
Country: PAL Area
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
Frame Rate
Set the recording frame rate in Slow & Quick Motion
On Format: HQ 1280/60P, HQ
1280/30P, HQ 1280/24P (NTSC)
1 to 60 (30)
recording.
On Format: HQ 1920/30P, HQ
1920/24P (NTSC)
1 to 30
On Format: HQ 1280/50P, HQ
1280/25P (PAL)
1 to 60 (25)
On Format: HQ 1920/25P (PAL)
1 to 30
3 sec / 10 sec / Clip
Set the time to play the last recorded clip using the Rec-
Review function.
Rec Review
Setting the
3 sec: Last 3 seconds
10 sec: Last 10 seconds
playback time for
Rec-Review
Clip: Entire duration of the clip
Setup Menu List
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Fade In Turn the fade-in function on/off.
On / Off
Fader
Setting the fade-in/
fade-out functions
Fade In Type
Select the fade-in mode.
White / Black
White: To fade in from a white screen
Black: To face in from a black screen
Fade In Time
Set the duration of the fade in.
1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 5 sec /
10 sec
Fade Out
Turn the fade-out function on/off.
On / Off
Fade Out Type
Select the fade-out mode.
White / Black
White: To fade out to a white screen
Black: To face out to a black screen
Fade Out Time
Set the duration of the fade out.
1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 5 sec /
10 sec
Level
Set the target level (to make brighter or darker) of auto iris
control in TLCS. (This setting also affects the gain control in
AGC mode and shutter-speed control in Auto Shutter mode.)
+1.0: Approx. one stop further open
+0.5: Approx. half a stop further open
0: Standard
TLCS
+1.0 / +0.5 / 0 / –0.5 / –1.0
Setting the Total
Level Control
System (auto
adjustment system
of gain, iris and
shutter)
–0.5: Approx. half a stop further closed
–1.0: Approx. one stop further closed
Mode
Set the auto iris control mode in TLCS.
Backlight: Backlight mode to reduce darkening of the center
subject against lights
Backlight / Standard /
Spotlight
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode to reduce blown-out highlights on
the center subject in the spotlight
Speed
–99 to +99 (+50)
Set the tracing speed of TLCS control.
Turn the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function on/off.
Set the maximum gain in AGC.
AGC
On / Off
AGC Limit
3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB
AGC Point
Set the iris point for switching to auto-iris and auto-shutter
F5.6 / F4 / F2.8
control when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter
Turn the Auto Shutter control function on/off.
On / Off
A.SHT Limit
1/100
Set the maximum shutter speed in Auto Shutter control.
1/150
1/200
1/250
A.SHT Point
Set the iris point for switching auto-iris and auto-shutter
F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16
control when Auto Shutter is on.
Setup Menu List
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Off / 1 / 2 / 3
Select the speed of change in white balance when the white
balance mode is switched.
Shockless
White
Set to “Off” to instantly change the white balance.
Select a larger number to change the white balance more
slowly through interpolation.
Setting the
shockless white
balance
ATW / MEM
Select the mode (ATW or Memory B) selected at the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
White Switch
<B>
Setting for the
WHITE BAL
switch
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
Set the tracing speed of ATW.
The larger the number you set, the speed becomes faster.
ATW Speed
Setting for Auto
Tracing White
Balance
On / Off
Set to “On” when a wide conversion lens is attached.
Wide
Conversion
Setting for use of a
wide conversion
lens
On / Off
Turn the Steady Shot (image stabilizer) function on/off.
Steady Shot
Setting the image
stabilizer
Normal / H INV / V INV /
Normal: Normal image direction
Image
H+V
H INV: To horizontally invert the image
V INV: To vertically invert the image
H+V: To horizontally and vertically invert the image
Select “Execute” to invert. (The screen is black during the
inversion process.)
Inversion
Setting the image
inversion function
Setup Menu List
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SET Menu
AUDIO SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
TRIM CH-1 Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 1 of external
–20 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) microphone input in steps of 3 dB in Manual audio
Audio Input
Setting for audio
inputs
adjustment mode.
[M]
TRIM CH-2
Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 2 of external
–20 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) microphone input in steps of 3 dB in Manual audio
adjustment mode.
INT MIC Level
Select the built-in microphone level in Manual audio
–12 dB / –6 dB / –0 dB / +6 dB adjustment mode.
/ +12 dB
Limiter
Turn the audio limiter on/off.
On / Off
MIC AGC
Select the sensitivity of the microphone inputs.
High / Low
AGC Link
Linked / Separated
Select the gain link condition when the audio level adjustment
is in AGC mode.
Linked: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain in
synchronization.
Separated: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain
independently according to the respective levels.
1KHz Tone
On / Off
Turn the 1-kHz reference tone signal on/off.
Turn the wind filter for channel 1 on/off.
Turn the wind filter for channel 2 on/off.
Wind Filter CH-1
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-2
On / Off
EXT CH Select
CH-1
CH-1: To record channel 1 audio input on both channels 1
and 2.
CH-1/CH-2
It is recommended to set the AUDIO SELECT (AUTO/
MANUAL) switch and AUDIO LEVEL control for CH-2
conditions as those for CH-1.
CH-1/CH-2: To record channel 1 and channel 2 inputs on the
respective channels.
Monitor CH
Select the audio channel(s) to be fed to the headphones and
the built-in speaker.
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4): Stereo
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4): Mix
CH-1 (CH-3): CH-1 (CH-3) only
CH-2 (CH-4): CH-2 (CH-4) only
Audio Output
Setting for audio
outputs
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4)
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4)
CH-1 (CH-3)
CH-2 (CH-4)
(
): with Output CH set to “CH-3/CH-4”
Output CH
CH-1/CH-2
CH-3/CH-4
Select audio output channels from either channels 1 and 2 or
channels 3 and 4.
Alarm Level
Set the alarm sound volume.
0 to 7 (4)
Beep
Select whether or not to sound a beep upon each operation.
On / Off
Setup Menu List
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO SET Menu
VIDEO SET
Menu items
Setting values
HD Mode
HD SDI Component
SD SDI Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI Interlace
SD HDMI Progressive
Composite
Contents
HD SDI Component: To output an HD analog component
signal from the COMPONENT OUT connector and an
HD SDI signal from the SDI OUT connector
SD SDI Component: To output an SD analog component
signal from the COMPONENT OUT connector and an
SD SDI signal from the SDI OUT connector
HD HDMI: To output an HD HDMI signal from the HDMI
OUT connector
Output Select
Setting the output
signals
SD Mode
SD SDI Component
SD HDMI Interlace
Composite
SD HDMI Interlace: To output an SD HDMI interlace signal
from the HDMI OUT connector
SD HDMI Progressive: To output an SD HDMI Progressive
signal from the HDMI OUT connector
Composite: To output a composite signal from the A/V OUT
connector
On / Off
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as
those on the LCD monitor/EVF screen to the output signals
from the COMPONENT OUT, SDI OUT and HDMI OUT
connectors. (This setting cannot be changed if “Output
Select” is “Composite.”)
YPbPr/Digital
Out Display
Setting the
character
information for the
component and
digital outputs
Note
On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP and SHOT MARK
screens, the same menus and status indications as those on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen are displayed regardless of the
setting of this item.
On / Off
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as
those on the LCD monitor/EVF screen to the output signal
from the A/V OUT connector. (This setting cannot be
changed if “Output Select” is other than “Composite.”)
Video Out
Display
Setting the
character
information for the
composite output
Note
On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP and SHOT MARK
screens, the same menus and status indications as those on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen are displayed regardless of the
setting of this item.
Set whether to add 7.5% setup to the output signal from the
A/V OUT connector when a format of NTSC is selected
(Invalid when a format of PAL is selected).
Setup
On / Off
Setting 7.5% setup
for the composite
signal
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: On
Other areas: Off
Setup Menu List
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO SET
Menu items
Setting values
Contents
Squeeze / Letterbox / Edge
Crop
Set the output mode (aspect) when outputting from the A/V
OUT connector, or when outputting SD signals in HD Mode
from the COMPONENT OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
(The setting cannot be changed when an SD format is selected
with “Output Select.”)
Down
Converter
Selecting the
operation mode of
the down converter
Squeeze: To horizontally reduce a 16:9 picture to output a 4:3
picture
Letterbox: To mask the upper and lower areas of a 4:3 picture
to display a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen
Edge Crop: To cut the both sides of a 16:9 picture to output a
4:3 picture
60i / 24PsF
Select the video output format in Camera mode when the
video format is HQ 1920/24P or HQ 1440/24P (invalid with
video formats other than HQ 1920/24P and HQ 1440/24P).
24P System
Selecting 24P
mode
LCD/VF SET Menu
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Color
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Contrast
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Brightness
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Backlight
High / Low
Mode
Color / B&W
Adjust the color of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Select the brightness of the EVF backlight.
LCD
Adjusting the LCD
monitor
EVF
Setting the
viewfinder
Select the display mode of the EVF in Camera mode.
Color: Color mode
B&W: Monochrome mode
Contrast
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Brightness
–99 to +99 ( 0)
Power
Auto / On
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the EVF screen.
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the EVF screen.
Set the condition to turn the EVF on.
Auto: To turn it on when the LCD monitor is closed or rotated
to the upside-down position.
On: To keep it on regardless of the status of the LCD monitor
Color
White / Red / Yellow / Blue
Level
High / Mid / Low
Select the color of the peaking signal.
Peaking
Setting the peaking
function for the
LCD monitor/EVF
[M]
Set the level of the peaking signal.
Setup Menu List
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Setting Turn all marker indications on/off in combination.
On / Off
Marker
Setting the
markers added to
pictures on the
LCD monitor/EVF
screen
Safety Zone
Turn the safety marker on/off.
On / Off
Safety Area
Select the size (ratio to the entire screen) of the safety zone
80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95%
marker.
[M]
Center Marker
On / Off
Turn the center marker on/off.
Turn the aspect marker on/off.
Select the ratio of the aspect marker.
Aspect Marker
On / Off
Aspect Select
4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 /
1.85:1 / 2.25:1 / 2.4:1
Aspect Mask
Select the brightness of images outside the aspect marker.
90% / 80% / 70% / 60% / 50% /
40% / 30% / 20% / 10% / 0%
Guide Frame
Turn the guide frame marker on/off.
On / Off
Zebra Select
1 / 2 / Both
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
1: To display zebra 1 only
Zebra
Setting the zebra
2: To display zebra 2 only
Both: To display both zebra 1 and zebra 2
pattern
[M]
Zebra1 Level
Set the display level of zebra 1.
50 to 107 (70)
Setup Menu List
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Video Level Warnings
On / Off
Turn the warning indication to be displayed when the picture
is too bright or too dark on/off.
Display On/Off
Selecting the items
to be displayed on
the LCD monitor/
EVF screen
Brightness Display
On / Off
Turn the numeric indication to show the picture brightness on/
off.
Histogram Display
On / Off
Turn the histogram indication to show the level distribution of
the picture on/off.
[M]
Lens Info
Meter / Feet / Off
Select the depth-of-field indication.
Meter: To indicate in meters
Feet: To indicate in feet
Off: To not indicate
Zoom Position
Number / Bar / Off
Select the type of zoom position indication.
Number: Indication with a number
Bar: Indication with a bar
Off: To not display
Audio Level Meter
Turn the audio level meter indication on/off.
On / Off
Timecode
Turn the time data (timecode, user bits, duration) indication
On / Off
on/off.
Battery Remain
Turn the battery remaining/DC input voltage indication on/
On / Off
off.
Media Remain
On / Off
Turn the media remaining indication on/off.
Turn the TLCS mode indication on/off.
TLCS Mode
On / Off
Steady Shot
Turn the Steady Shot indication on/off.
On / Off
Focus Mode
On / Off
Turn the focus operation mode indication on/off.
Turn the white balance mode indication on/off.
Turn the Picture Profile indication on/off.
Turn the ND filter setting indication on/off.
Turn the iris setting indication on/off.
White Balance Mode
On / Off
Picture Profile
On / Off
Filter Position
On / Off
Iris Position
On / Off
Gain Setting
Turn the gain setting indication on/off.
On / Off
Shutter Setting
On / Off
Turn the shutter mode and speed indication on/off.
Turn the fader operation mode indication on/off.
Fader Status
On / Off
Rec Mode
Turn the special recording mode (Frame Rec, Interval Rec,
On / Off
S&Q Motion) indication on/off.
Video Format
Turn the video format indication on/off.
On / Off
Setup Menu List
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TC/UB SET Menu
TC/UB SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Mode
Preset / Regen / Clock
Set the timecode mode.
Timecode
Setting the
timecode
Preset: To start the timecode from the specified value
Regen (regeneration): To continue the timecode from that of
the previous clip
Clock: To use the current clock time as the timecode
Run
Rec Run / Free Run
Set the running mode when the timecode mode is set to
“Preset.”
Rec Run: The timecode advances only in recording mode.
Free Run: The timecode keeps advancing regardless of
recording.
Setting
Set the timecode to a desired value.
Select “SET” to finish the setting.
Reset
Select “Execute” to reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00.
Execute / Cancel
Mode
Fix / Date
Set the user bit mode.
Fix: To use a desired fixed value as the user bits
Date: To use the current date
Users Bit
Setting the user
bits
Setting
DF / NDF
Set the user bits to a desired value.
Set the timecode format.
DF: Drop frame
NDF: Non drop frame
TC Format
Setting the time
code format
Setup Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
OTHERS Menu
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset the camcorder to the factory status.
All Reset
Resetting to the
factory status
Store
Execute/Cancel
Recall
Select “Execute” to store the setting values in an SxS memory
card.
Camera Data
Storing/recalling
the menu settings
Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from an SxS
Execute/Cancel
memory card.
UTC –12:00 to +14:00
Set the time-zone difference from UTC in steps of 30
minutes.
Time Zone
Setting the time
difference
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: –5:00
Europe area: 0:00
Oceania: +10:00
Date/Time
Set the current time and date.
Clock Set
Setting the built-in
clock
12H/24H
12H / 24H
Select the display mode of time.
12H: 12-hour mode
24H: 24-hour mode
Date Mode
YYMMDD / MMDDYY /
DDMMYY
Select the display mode of the date.
YYMMDD: In sequence of year, month, day
MMDDYY: In sequence of month, day, year
DDMMYY: In sequence of day, month, year
English / Chinese / Japanese
English: To display in English
Chinese: To display in Chinese
Japanese: To display in Japanese
Language
Selecting the
language for
menus and
messages
Note
“Japanese” is effective only on messages for warning and
caution. The menus and status indications do not change.
Setup Menu List
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
<1> Assign a function to the ASSIGN button of the corresponding
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL / number.
ATW / ATW Hold / Rec Review The selectable functions are common.
Assign Button
Assigning
functions to the
assignable buttons
/ Rec / Picture Cache / Freeze
Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / EVF Mode /
Marker: For turning the markers on/off
Last Clip DEL: For deleting the last recorded clip
ATW: For turning ATW on/off
ATW Hold: For holding the ATW value
Rec Review: For starting a Rec Review
BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens Rec: For starting/stopping recording
Info / OK Mark Picture Cache: For turning picture caching on/off
<2>
Freeze Mix: For executing Freeze Mix
Expanded Focus: For turning Expanded Focus on/off
Spotlight: For selecting TLCS Spotlight mode
Backlight: For selecting TLCS Backlight mode
IR Remote: For activating/deactivating the IR Remote
Commander
Shot Mark1: For adding shot mark 1 (HD Mode only)
Shot Mark2: For adding shot mark 2 (HD Mode only)
Fader: For turning the Fader function on/off
EVF Mode: For switching between color and monochrome
modes of the EVF
BRT Disp: For turning the brightness level indication on/off
Histogram: For turning the histogram indication on/off
Lens Info: For turning the depth-of-field indication on/off
OK Mark: For adding OK mark (HD Mode only)
Off: No function
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / ATW Hold / Rec Review
/ Rec / Picture Cache / Freeze
Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / EVF Mode /
BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens
Info / OK Mark
<3>
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / ATW Hold / Rec Review
/ Rec / Picture Cache / Freeze
Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / EVF Mode /
BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens
Info / OK Mark
<4>
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL /
ATW / ATW Hold / Rec Review
/ Rec / Picture Cache / Freeze
Mix / Expanded Focus /
Spotlight / Backlight / IR
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot
Mark2 / Fader / EVF Mode /
BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens
Info / OK Mark
Front
High / Low / Off
Set the brightness of the tally lamp on the front.
High: To brighten the lamp
Tally
Setting the tally
Low: To dim the lamp
lamps
Off: To not light the lamp
Rear
Turn the tally lamp on the rear on/off.
On / Off
Hours (Sys)
Hours (Reset)
The non-resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
The resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
Select “Execute” to reset the Hours (Reset) value to 0.
Hours Meter
Displaying the
hours meter
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Setup Menu List
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
On / Off
Set to “On” to activate remote control operations from the
supplied IR Remote Commander.
IR Remote
Activating/
deactivating the
Remote
Note
The setting automatically returns to “Off” when the
Commander
camcorder is turned off.
Low BATT
5% / 10% / 15% / ... / 45% /
50%
Set the battery level at which the Low BATT warning is
generated (in steps of 5%).
Battery Alarm
Setting the low
power alarm
BATT Empty
Set the battery level at which the BATT Empty warning is
3% to 7% (3%)
generated.
DC Low Volt1
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt1 warning is
11.5 V to 17.0 V (11.5 V)
generated.
DC Low Volt2
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt2 warning is
11.0 V to 14.0 V (11.0 V)
generated.
Type
The type (product name) is displayed.
Battery INFO
Showing
information
regarding the
battery pack
(display only)
MFG Date
Charge Count
The date of manufacture is displayed.
The accumulated number of times of charge/discharge is
displayed.
Capacity
The estimated total capacity of full charge is displayed.
The current output voltage is displayed.
Voltage
Remaining
All / Part / Off
The current remaining level is displayed.
All: All Direct menu operations are permitted.
Part: A part of Direct menu operations is permitted. The
operation is limited depending on the GAIN, SHUTTER,
or WHITE BAL switch setting.
Direct Menu
Setting the Direct
menu function
[M]
Off: No Direct menu operation is permitted.
HDV / DVCAM / Disable
HDV: To input/output an HDV stream (HD Mode only)
DVCAM: To input/output a DVCAM stream
Disable: To not use the i.LINK connector
i.LINK I/O
Setting for input/
output at the
i.LINK connector
Notes
• When you set this item to “HDV” or “DVCAM,” no signal
is fed out from the SDI OUT connector.
• No HDV stream can be input/output when the video format
is not HD SP mode.
Internal / Both / External
Internal: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
an SxS memory card in a built-in slot.
Trigger Mode
Setting whether to
trigger recording
start/stop for an
external device
connected to via
the i.LINK
Both: To activate recording start/stop operations both for an
SxS memory card in a built-in slot and the external
recording device connected via the i.LINK connector.
External: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
the external recording device connected via the i.LINK
connector.
connector
[M]
Setup Menu List
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Select the color system for the area where you will use the
camcorder.
Country
Setting the area for
use
NTSC Area / PAL Area
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: NTSC Area
Other areas: PAL Area
HD / SD
Switch between HD Mode and SD Mode for recording/
playback.
HD/SD Mode
Select “Execute” to switch.
HD Mode
Country: NTSC Area
HQ 1920/60i
Select the video format for recording.
HD Mode
• Bit rate
Video Format
Selecting the video
format
HQ 1440/60i
HQ or SP
SP 1440/60i
• Horizontal resolution
1920, 1440, or 1280
• Frame rate
24, 25, 30, 50, or 60
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
SD Mode
• Frame rate
25, 30, 50, or 60
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
• Aspect
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
SP 1440/24P
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
Country: PAL Area
HQ 1920/50i
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i
SQ (Squeeze) or EC (Edge Crop)
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
SD Mode
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: HQ 1920/60i
Other areas: HQ 1920/50i
Country: NTSC Area
DVCAM60i SQ
DVCAM60i EC
DVCAM30P SQ
DVCAM30P EC
Country: PAL Area
DVCAM50i SQ
DVCAM50i EC
DVCAM25P SQ
DVCAM25P EC
Setup Menu List
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Title Prefix
Set the first 4-alphanumeric part of the clip names.
Clip
nnn_
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabets, numerics 0 to 9,
Setting for clip
(nnn=least three digits of the
serial number)
Number Set
- (hyphen), and _ (underscore).
name or deletion
Set the second 4-numeric part of the clip name.
000l to 9999
Update Media(A)/Media(B)
Select “Execute” to update the managerial file on the SxS
1)
Execute / Cancel
memory card in the selected slot.
Last Clip DEL
Select “Execute” to delete the last recorded clip.
Execute / Cancel
All Clips DEL
Select “Execute” to delete all clips on the active SxS memory
Execute / Cancel
card.
Note
Clips to which you applied OK mark cannot be deleted.
All Clips CPY
AkB
To copy all clips on an SxS memory card to the other.
Select “Execute” to begin.
BkA
Media (A)
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot A.
Format Media
Formatting SxS
memory cards
Media (B)
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot B.
Execute / Cancel
Execute / Cancel
Use when updating of the camcorder is required.
Version Up
Select “Execute” to begin.
Updating this unit
Vx.xxx
The current software version of the camcorder is displayed.
Version
Showing the
version of this unit
1)If recording/playback cannot be made with an SxS
memory card because it has been operated with a
device other than this camcorder, or for some other
reason, updating the managerial file on the card may
improve the situation.
Setup Menu List
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors
To display recording/playback pictures on an
external monitor, select the output signal and use
an appropriate cable for the monitor to be
connected.
L
MO
NI
COMPONENT
V
O
T
O
THUM
L
R
C
N
AI
R
L
SEL
/S
ET
F
R
E
V
P
AN
CEL
LA
Y
/P
AU
SE
F
F
W
P
/
RE
D
V
S
TO
P
NE
XT
OUT
T
S
T
AR RE
T/S
C
TOP
H
O
L
FF
HOLD
-2
CH
IN
O
DI
A
U
-1
CH
C
8V
MI
4
C+
MI
E
LIN
C
48V
MI
+
C
MI
E
LIN
R
T
A
O
. L
S
T
N
A
N
T
I
I O
O
H
S
N
B
O
L
F F
D C
B
I G
T T A B
I S
D
T
H
T
I N
Y
P
O
F
A
L
S
R
A B
G
I
R
B
R
M
A
C
/
H
C
L
D
A
R U D
T / U
C
T
I
/
-
N
O
I
T
B
T
S
U
T
A
S
R
V
E
I
C
W
V
R
/D
E
E
D
V
XP
H
E
A
C
A/V OUT
N
U
D
S
E
F
D
O
M
E
N
U
Component video
C
A
N
C
E
L
C
A
O
M
E
F
F
M
S
T
R
A
A
O
S
R
E
T
P
L/
E
/
S
DI
IN
S
T
E
A
T
C
H
H
-1
A
M
U
TO
P
P
IC
AN
T
U
cable (supplied)
UA
R
R
E
E
L
O
A
IN
F
IL
U
T
D
D
C
IO
LE
ENT
MPON
OUT
S
EX
E
R
EL
T
C
CO
T
E
A
A
U
C
D
S
E
IO
-2
IN
A
M
U
TO
UA
AN
A/V OUT
AV connection
cable (supplied)
L
I
N
T
T
EX
P
M
T
MI OU
W
-E
HD
X
1
R
Y
TER
BA
T
E
EAS
REL
T
U
O
I
D
S
HDMI
OUT
HDMI cable
(optional)
SDI
OUT
COMPONENT
IN
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
75-ohm
coaxial
cable
(optional)
HDMI IN
SDI IN
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the
same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
SDI OUT connector (BNC)
The connector is set at the factory to output an HD
SDI signal.
According to the signal fed to the monitor, set
“YPbPr/Digital Out Display” or “Video Out
“On.”
When outputting SD signals in HD Mode, select
in advance the output mode (Squeeze, Letterbox,
or Edge Crop) with “Down Converter” of the
VIDEO SET menu.
When you set the camcorder to SD Mode, the
connector outputs an SD SDI signal.
SET menu, you can change the setting so that it
outputs down-converted SD SDI signal for
monitoring even in HD Mode. (The HD/SD
switching becomes valid also on the
COMPONENT OUT connector in
synchronization.)
Note
Use a commercially available 75-ohm coaxial
cable for connection.
SD signals down-converted for output have the
following restrictions:
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals,
those of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as
NTSC signals, and those of 23.98P are output as
2-3 pulled-down NTSC signals.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
the VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
Connecting External Monitors
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
Note
If input/output at the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
out from the SDI OUT connector.
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
COMPONENT OUT connector (mini-D
connector)
The connector is set at the factory to output HD
analog component signals for monitoring.
When you set the camcorder to SD Mode, the
connector outputs SD analog component signals.
SET menu, you can change the setting so that it
outputs down-converted SD analog component
signals for monitoring even in HD Mode. (The
HD/SD switching becomes valid also on the SDI
OUT connector in synchronization.)
Use the supplied component video cable for
connection.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
the VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
HDMI OUT connector (Type A connector)
Signal output from this connector is enabled by
SET menu.
In HD Mode, you can select HD HDMI, SD
HDMI interlace, or SD HDMI Progressive
output.
In SD Mode, only an SD HDMI interlace signal
can be output.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
connection.
To display the menus and status information on
the connected monitor
the VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
A/V OUT connector (audio/video
composite multiconnector)
SET menu is set to “Composite,” the connector
outputs 2-channel audio and down-converted SD
analog composite signals for monitoring.
Use the supplied AV connection cable for
connection.
Connecting External Monitors
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect with a USB cable
When you connect the camcorder or the SBAC-
US10 SxS Memory Card USB Reader/Writer
(optional) using the supplied USB cable, the
memory card in the slot is acknowledged as an
extended drive by the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in this
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Operating Clips With a
Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using the optional nonlinear editing
software.
For these purposes, the clips on an SxS memory
card can be operated by directly loading the card
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or
the optional SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an
USB cable as shown below.
SxS memory card
SBAC-US10
(optional)
Preparations
USB cable
(supplied
with the
To use the ExpressCard slot of a computer
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
camcorder)
USB cable
(supplied with
SBAC-US10)
For the operating requirements for the computer, see
Note
The SxS Device Driver Software on the CD-
ROM supplied with the camcorder must be
installed on your computer. Before installation,
be sure to read the enclosed SxS Device Driver
Software End-User License Agreement.
Notes
• When connecting the USB cable to the
computer, be careful to check the form and
direction of the USB connector.
• The camcorder and the SBAC-US10 do not
work on the bus power from the computer.
Supply the operating power independently.
For information on installation of the driver, refer to
the ReadMe on the supplied CD-ROM.
For support information for the driver, visit the
following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
To check the connection to the camcorder
1
Turn the camcorder on by setting the
power switch to CAMERA or MEDIA.
to the
ExpressCard
slot
A message prompting you to confirm that
you wish to enable the USB connection is
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
SxS memory card
Computer with SxS
Device Driver Software
installed
Connect USB Now?
Execute
With a Windows computer, check that a
Removable Disk appears in My Computer. This
indicates normal status.
C
ancel
Note
With a Macintosh computer, an icon is displayed
on the menu bar.
This message will not be displayed while
another confirmation message or in-progress
Operating Clips With a Computer
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
message (e.g., for formatting or restoration of
an SxS memory card) is shown on the screen.
It appears when formatting or restoration is
completed.
The message is also not displayed while the
CLIP INFO screen is shown on the screen. It
appears when an operation on the CLIP
INFO screen is completed or you return to
the thumbnail screen.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
Note
Do not select “Card Power Off” from the SxS
memory card icon displayed on the menu bar.
2
3
Select “Execute” by operating the jog
dial or the joystick.
Using the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing
Software
The screen displays the following:
To copy clips to the local disk of a computer, the
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software must be
used.
Install the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
on the supplied CD-ROM to your computer.
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
easily handle the clips without considering such
data and directory structure by using the XDCAM
EX Clip Browsing Software.
USB Connecting
With Windows, check that the memory
card is displayed as a removable disk in
My Computer.
With Macintosh, check that a “NO
NAME” or “Untitled” folder was
created on the desktop.
Note
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS
memory card by using the Explorer (Windows) or
Finder (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained
by the clips may not be maintained. To avoid such
a problem, use the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing
Software.
This indicates that the connection is active.
(The folder name on the desktop of the
Macintosh computer can be changed as
needed.)
Note
For the operating requirements, installation and
operations, visit the web sites shown in “XDCAM EX
web sites” on page 15 or refer to the User’s Guide
contained in the CD-ROM.
The following operations must be eliminated
when the access lamp is lit in red.
• Turning the power off or disconnecting the
power cord
• Removing the SxS memory card
• Disconnecting the USB cable
For support information on the XDCAM EX Clip
Browsing Software, visit the web sites shown in
page of the supplied CD-ROM.
When using the SBAC-US10, refer to the operating
instructions of the SBAC-US10.
Using a nonlinear editing system
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
computer in advance, using the supplied
Removing an SxS memory card
Windows
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.
XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software.
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
Drive(X:) from the displayed menu.
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware
message appears then remove the card.
Operating Clips With a Computer
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use Final Cut Pro of Apple Inc.
It is necessary to convert the clips to files that can
be edited with the Final Cut Pro, using XDCAM
Transfer.
Connecting an External
Device (i.LINK
Connection)
For information on XDCAM Transfer or
Log & Transfer, visit the web sites shown in
“XDCAM EX web sites” on page 15 or on the cover
page of the supplied CD-ROM.
When an HDV-compatible video format (SP
1440/60i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/24P) or a
DVCAM-compatible video format (format of SD
Mode) is selected, setting the “i.LINK I/O” of the
OTHERS menu to “HDV” or “DVCAM” enables
signal inputs/outputs via the i.LINK(HDV/DV)
connector.
You can record the same images as those
recorded on an SxS memory card in this
camcorder on an external device connected to the
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector, or record playback
pictures (HDV streams) of the external device on
the memory card in the camcorder.
Notes on use of applications
When using any of the following application
programs, be sure to use the latest version that
supports this camcorder.
• XDCAM EX Clip Browsing Software
• XDCAM Transfer (PDZK-P1)
• Log & Transfer (PDZK-LT1)
If you use the XDCAM EX Clip Browsing
Software V2.5.1 or earlier to view clips, clips
recorded in SD Mode become invisible.
In such a case, proceed by either of the following
methods:
For playback, DVCAM streams of 16-bit 2-
channel lock audio are acceptable.
Nonlinear editing conforming to the HDV format
is also enabled.
• Execute “Update Media” of “Clip” of the
• Use the latest version of the XDCAM EX Clip
Browsing Software to view the clips in the
respective card (or folder).
Notes
• DVCAM streams cannot be recorded with the
camcorder.
• When you set “i.LINK I/O” of the OTHERS
menu to “HDV” or “DVCAM,” no signal is
output from the SDI OUT connector.
• Use the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector only for
one-to-one i.LINK connection.
• When you change a setting which affects output
signals from the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector,
such as “i.LINK I/O,” “HD/SD Mode,” “Video
Format” of the OTHERS menu, “Output
Select,” or “Down Converter” of the VIDEO
SET menu, disconnect the i.LINK cable then
change the setting. Changing such a setting with
the i.LINK cable connected may cause
improper operation of the connected i.LINK
device.
Recording the Camcorder Picture
on an External Device
When you set the camcorder to Camera mode, the
picture being shot with this camcorder is output as
an HDV or DVCAM stream via the
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on a connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in
synchronization with the REC START/STOP
operation on this camcorder.
• While you can record shot marks on the
memory card during recording, they are not
added to the pictures recorded on the external
device.
1
Perform the preparatory settings of the
camcorder.
Nonlinear Editing
OTHERS menu to “HDV” or “DVCAM.”
HDV: To output an HDV stream when you
set the video format to SP 1440/60i, SP
1440/50i, or SP 1440/24P in HD Mode
DVCAM: To output a DVCAM stream in
SD Mode
OTHERS menu to “Both” or “External.”
Both: To record both on the memory card
in the camcorder and on the external device
External: To record only on the external
device
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear
editing system connected via the i.LINK(HDV/
DV) connector.
Notes
• The i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector of this
camcorder is a 4-pin connector. Check the
number of pins of the i.LINK connector on your
computer and use an appropriate i.LINK cable.
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the
computer, it may take some time until the
display is reflected on the computer.
• If the playback clip is short or the playback
starting point is near the end of the clip, the
i.LINK signal may be interrupted between the
clip and the next clip. When you try to capture
such a signal using the nonlinear editing system,
a malfunction may occur, depending on the
nonlinear editing software in use.
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or
24 times normal with the nonlinear editing
system, no i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a
case, the picture on the LCD monitor may stay
frozen.
2
Set the external device to recording
standby status.
For operations of the external device, refer to
the operation manual of that device.
3
4
Set the camcorder to Camera mode by
setting the power switch to CAMERA.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
The external device starts recording in
synchronization.
• High-speed playback picture may not be
displayed on the computer screen, depending on
the nonlinear editing software in use.
The status of the external device is displayed in
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Setting on this camcorder
Set “i.LINK I/O” of the OTHERS menu to
“HDV” or “DVCAM.”
Indication
Status of the external device
In HDV recording standby
In HDV recording
STBY
HDV
REC HDV
STBY
REC
z
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,
refer to the operation manual of the software.
In DV recording standby
In DV recording
DV
DV
z
Recording External Input Signals
Notes
• Operation may be different depending on the
type of external device.
The HDV stream input from a device connected
via the i.LINK connector can be recorded on an
SxS memory card in this camcorder.
The timecodes superimposed on the i.LINK input
are recorded regardless of the settings of the
camcorder.
• Although there is some time lag from which you
press the REC START/STOP button until the
i.LINK status indication changes, the same
pictures are recorded on the memory card in this
camcorder and the external device if “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Both.”
Note
DVCAM streams cannot be recorded.
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Set the external signal to a format that
can be recorded on the camcorder.
About i.LINK
Signals of 1440 × 1080/59.94i can be
set to SP 1440/60i or SP 1440/24P. Signals of
1440 × 1080/50i can be recorded when set to
SP 1440/50i.
Recording is not allowed with other
combinations of “Video Format” and input
signals.
This section explains the specifications and
features of i.LINK.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to:
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of
data such as digital audio and digital video
signals.
• Control other i.LINK devices.
• Easily connect multiple devices with a single
i.LINK cable.
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer
and other operations.
Other advantages include the following feature.
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices,
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and
other operations not only
with the directly connected devices but also with
any of the devices that are connected to those
devices. Therefore, you do not need to be
concerned with device connection order.
However, depending on the features and
specifications of the connected devices, you may
need to use certain functions differently, and you
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain
operations.
OTHERS menu to “HDV.”
3
4
Set the camcorder to Media mode.
Press the STOP button to set the
camcorder to STOP mode.
The input image is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen and the monitor
connected via the COMPONENT OUT
connector or A/V OUT connector.
The audio signal is output from the built-in
speaker (or headphones connected to the
headphone jack) and the speaker of the
monitor connected to the A/V OUT
connector.
5
Press the REC START/STOP button on
the handle.
Recording begins.
Notes
• The REC START/STOP button on the grip does
not function.
• An error is generated in the following cases. In
such a case, cancel Recording mode by pressing
the REC START/STOP button.
—The video format of input signal does not
match that specified on the camcorder.
—A copy-protected stream is being fed in.
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal
during recording, the tally lamps and the
i.LINK zREC status indication on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen flash, indicating that no
signal is being recorded on the SxS memory
card.
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by
Sony, is a trademark supported by many
companies worldwide.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Note
The camcorder can be connected to one device
with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you
connect with a device that has two or more
i.LINK connectors, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the
connected device.
When an input signal is resumed, recording is
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the
memory card.
About i.LINK
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About data transfer speed of i.LINK
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of
1)
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is identified on
“Specifications” page of the operating
instructions supplied with the device or near its
i.LINK connector.
1)When connecting with the device that support
different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer
speed may be different from those described on the
i.LINK connectors.
What is Mbps?
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at
which data is transmitted per second. In case of
100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be
transmitted per second.
i.LINK operation with your camcorder
For details on operation when other equipment
with i.LINK (HDV) connector is connected, see
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and
necessary software, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the connected device.
About the required i.LINK cable
Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 4-pin-to-4-pin
i.LINK cable (for HDV dubbing) to connect the
i.LINK devices.
i.LINK and
are trademarks.
About i.LINK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
Appendixes
Important Notes on Operation
Use and Storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
Viewfinder release
lever
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can
cause excessive internal heat build-up.
D
L
O
H
L
F
F
O
After use
Always set the power switch to OFF.
A
T
S
H
N
S
IT
R
A
O
T
IO
N
O
N
Before storing the unit for a long period
L
E
N
S
IN
F
O
B
R
T
D
IS
P
H
IS
T
O
G
R
A
M
Remove the battery pack.
Grip the handle when carrying
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit,
contact your Sony dealer.
Grip the handle to carry. If you carry it by other
parts, such as the front microphone block or the
LCD monitor block, the camcorder may drop,
causing injury.
Note about the battery terminal
Do not leave the camcorder with the lenses
facing the sun
Direct sunlight can enter through the lenses, be
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.
Shipping
• Remove the memory cards before transporting
the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other
transportation service, pack it in the shipping
carton of the unit.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
Care of the unit
Use and storage locations
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lens
using a blower.
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places:
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0ºC to 40ºC or 32ºF to 104ºF)
Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50ºC (122ºF).
• In damp or dusty locations
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, as
these may cause discoloration or other damage to
the finish of the unit.
To remove dust from inside the viewfinder
remove the viewfinder by sliding it while holding
the viewfinder release lever downward.
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
Important Notes on Operation
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
Flicker
extended periods
If recording is made under lighting produced by
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this unit be
powered off.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panels are manufactured with
extremely high-precision technology that yields
effective pixel rates of 99.99% or higher.
However, very rarely, one or more
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently
lit in white, red, blue, or green.
In such cases, set the Flicker-Reduction function
In some cases, such phenomena may not be
improved with the Flicker-Reduction function.
It is recommend to set the electronic shutter speed
1
1
to /
sec. in 50-Hz areas and to / in 60-Hz
60
100
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such
pixels have no effect on the recorded data, and the
unit may be used with confidence even if they are
present.
areas.
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS sensors) for reading video
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
screen may appear slightly skewed.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image
sensors
Flash band
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.
They do not indicate malfunctions.
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a
light source that quickly flashes.
White flecks
Note on the viewfinder display
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CMOS image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
• Pictures on the LCD monitor and EVF screen
may be distorted by the following operations:
—Changing the video format
—Rec Review
—Starting playback from the Thumbnail
screen
—Reversing the LCD panel
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
—Switching the Expanded Focus display
• When you change the eye direction in the EVF,
you may see primary colors red, green, and
blue, but this is not a defect of the camcorder.
These primary colors are not recorded on any
recording media.
Aliasing
Note on data compatibility with other
XDCAM EX-series products
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
When you use a PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 to play
materials recorded on the PMW-EX1R, any
Important Notes on Operation
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
media in which clips of formats not supported by
the PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 have been recorded
cannot be used.
picture profiles of the PMW-EX1R cannot be
used on the PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 and vice
versa.
Formats and Limitations
of Outputs
Video Formats and Output
Formats
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording medium.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then
perform formatting of the medium using “Format
The format of output signals from the
COMPONENT OUT, SDI OUT, and HDMI
OUT connectors varies according to the HD/SD
Mode setting, recording/playback video formats
and the kind of the output signal (the setting of
“Output Select” of the VIDEO SET menu).
Notes
• While the COMPONENT OUT connector and
SDI OUT connectors can be enabled at the same
time, the HDMI OUT connector and the A/V
OUT connector cannot be simultaneously
enabled with another output connector.
• When “i.LINK I/O” of the OTHERS menu is
set to “HDV” or “DVCAM,” no signal is output
from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output formats in E-E (recording standby) status/recording (Camera mode)
Analog component signals from the
The SDI OUT connector outputs serial digital
signals of the same format as that of the analog
component signals fed from the COMPONENT
OUT connector.
COMPONENT OUT connector are output in the
format shown below according to the “Video
Format” setting of the OTHERS menu and the
“Output Select” setting of the VIDEO SET menu.
“Video Format”
Output format
setting
“Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting:
HD SDI/Component
HD HDMI
SD SDI/Component
SD HDMI Interlace
Composite
SD HDMI Progressive
HQ 1920/60i
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
1920×1080/59.94i
1440×1080/59.94i
720×480/59.94i
720×480/59.94P
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1440×1080/29.97PsF
1920×1080/59.94i2)
720×480/29.97PsF
720×480/59.94i2)
HQ 1920/24P
(24P System: 60i)
HQ 1920/24P1)
(24P System: 24PsF)
HQ 1440/24P
1920×1080/23.98PsF
1440×1080/59.94i2)
1280×720/59.94P
1280×720/59.94P4)
1280×720/59.94P9)
Unselectable
720×480/59.94P2)
SP 1440/24P
720×480/59.94i3)
720×480/29.97PsF5)
720×480/59.94i2)
720×480/59.94i SQ
720×480/59.94i EC
720×480/29.97PsF SQ
720×480/29.97PsF EC
720×576/50i
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
DVCAM/60i SQ
DVCAM/60i EC
DVCAM/30P SQ
DVCAM/30P EC
HQ 1920/50i
Unselectable
1920×1080/50i
720×576/50P
HQ 1440/50i
1440×1080/50i
720×480/50i
SP 1440/50i
HQ 1920/25P
720×576/25PsF
1920×1080/25PsF
1440×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P
HQ 1440/25P
720×576/50i6)
HQ 1280/50P
1280×720/50P7)
Unselectable
720×576/25PsF8)
720×576/50i SQ
720×576/50i EC
720×576/25PsF SQ
720×576/25PsF EC
HQ 1280/25P
DVCAM/50i SQ
DVCAM/50i EC
DVCAM/25P SQ
DVCAM/25P EC
Unselectable
1)If “Output Select” is set to “HD HDMI” and “24P
System” is set to “24PsF” for HQ 1920/24P, this
setting is ignored and a 2-3 pulldown 1920/60i signal
is output.
2)59.94i provided through 2-3 pulldown of 23.98P
3)59.94i provided through conversion from 59.94P
4)59.94P provided by outputting each frame of 29.97P
two times
7)50P provided by outputting each frame of 25P two
times
8)25PsF provided through conversion from 25P
9)59.94P provided by repeating each frame of 23.98P
two or three times
5)29.97PsF provided through conversion from 29.97P
6)50i provided through conversion from 50P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output formats when a thumbnail screen is displayed (Media mode)
Analog component signals from the
The SDI OUT connector outputs serial digital
COMPONENT OUT connector are output in the
format shown below according to the “Video
Format” setting of the OTHERS menu and the
“Output Select” setting of the VIDEO SET menu.
signals of the same format as that of the analog
component signals fed from the COMPONENT
OUT connector.
“Video Format”
Output format
setting
“Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting:
HD SDI/Component
HD HDMI
SD SDI/Component
SD HDMI Interlace
Composite
SD HDMI Progressive
HQ 1920/60i
1920×1080/59.94i
720×480/59.94i
720×480/59.94P
HQ 1440/60i
1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440/60i
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
SP 1440/24P
1920×1080/59.94i
1440×1080/59.94i
1920×1080/59.94i
1440×1080/59.94i
720×480/59.94P
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
DVCAM/60i SQ
DVCAM/60i EC
DVCAM/30P SQ
DVCAM/30P EC
HQ 1920/50i
1280×720/59.94P
720×480/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P
Unselectable
Unselectable
1920×1080/50i
720×576/50i
720×576/50P
HQ 1440/50i
1440×1080/50i
720×480/50i
SP 1440/50i
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
DVCAM/50i SQ
DVCAM/50i EC
DVCAM/25P SQ
DVCAM/25P EC
1920×1080/50i
1440×1080/50i
1280×720/50P
720×576/50i
720×576/25PsF
720×576/50i
Unselectable
Unselectable
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Output formats in clip playback mode (Media mode)
Analog component signals from the
COMPONENT OUT connector are output in the
format shown below according to the video
format of the playback clip and the “Output
Select” setting (HD or SD) of the VIDEO SET
menu.
The SDI OUT connector outputs serial digital
signals of the same format as that of the analog
component signals fed from the COMPONENT
OUT connector.
When the frame rate setting of the video format is 60i/60P/30P/24P
Video format of
playback clip
Output format
“Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting:
HD SDI/Component
HD HDMI
SD SDI/Component
SD HDMI Interlace
Composite
SD HDMI Progressive
HQ 1920/60i
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
HQ 1920/30P
1920×1080/59.94i
1440×1080/59.94i
720×480/59.94i
720×480/59.94P
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1440×1080/29.97PsF
1920×1080/59.94i2)
720×480/29.97PsF
HQ 1440/30P
720×480/59.94i2)
HQ 1920/24P
(24P System: 60i)
1)
HQ 1920/24P
1920×1080/23.98PsF
1440×1080/59.94i2)
1280×720/59.94P
(24P System: 24PsF)
HQ 1440/24P
SP 1440/24P
720×480/59.94i3)
720×480/29.97PsF5)
720×480/59.94i2)
720×480/59.94i SQ
720×480/59.94i EC
720×480/30PsF SQ
720×480/30PsF EC
720×480/59.94i7)
HQ 1280/60P
4)
HQ 1280/30P
1280×720/59.94P
6)
HQ 1280/24P
1280×720/59.94P
DVCAM/60i SQ
DVCAM/60i EC
DVCAM/30P SQ
DVCAM/30P EC
HQ 1920/50i
Unselectable
Unselectable
None
1920×1080/59.94i7)
1440×1080/59.94i7)
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i
1920×1080/29.97PsF7)
720×480/29.97PsF7)
HQ 1920/25P
1440×1080/29.97PsF7)
1280×720/60P
HQ 1440/25P
7)
720×480/59.94i7)
720×480/29.97PsF7)
None
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
1280×720/60P2)
Unselectable
DVCAM/50i SQ
DVCAM/50i EC
DVCAM/25P SQ
DVCAM/25P EC
Unselectable
1)If “Output Select” is set to “HD HDMI” and “24P
System” is set to “24PsF” for HQ 1920/24P, this
setting is ignored and a 2-3 pulldown 1920/60i signal
is output.
2)59.94i provided through 2-3 pulldown of 23.98P
3)59.94i provided through conversion from 59.94P
4)59.94P provided by outputting each frame of 29.97P
two times
6)59.94P provided by repeating each frame of 23.98P
two or three times.
7)Simplified playback, component signals only. The
actual frame rate of the output signal is 1.001 times of
the value shown in the table. Some frame may be
repeated when converting the frame rate. SDI and
HDMI are not output.
5)29.97PsF provided through conversion from 29.97P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the frame rate setting of the video format is 50i/50P/25P
Video format of
playback clip
Output format
“Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting: “Output Select” setting:
HD SDI/Component
HD HDMI
SD SDI/Component
SD HDMI Interlace
Composite
SD HDMI Progressive
1920×1080/50i1)
720×576/50i1)
HQ 1920/60i
None
1440×1080/50i1)
HQ 1440/60i
SP 1440/60i
1920×1080/25PsF1)
1440×1080/25PsF1)
1920×1080/50i2)
1440×1080/50i2)
720×576/25PsF1)
HQ 1920/30P
HQ 1440/30P
HQ 1920/24P
HQ 1440/24P
SP 1440/24P
720×576/50i1)
1280×720/50P1)
HQ 1280/60P
HQ 1280/30P
HQ 1280/24P
DVCAM/60i SQ
DVCAM/60i EC
DVCAM/30P SQ
DVCAM/30P EC
HQ 1920/50i
1280×720/50P3)
Unselectable
720×576/50i2)
None
Unselectable
1920×1080/50i
720×576/50i
720×576/50P
HQ 1440/50i
1440×1080/50i
SP 1440/50i
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
HQ 1280/50P
HQ 1280/25P
DVCAM/50i SQ
DVCAM/50i EC
DVCAM/25P SQ
DVCAM/25P EC
1920×1080/25PsF
1440×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P
1280×720/50P5)
Unselectable
720×576/25PsF
720×576/50i4)
720×576/25PsF6)
720×576/50i SQ
720×576/50i EC
720×576/25PsF SQ
720×576/25PsF EC
Unselectable
1)Simplified playback, component signals only. The
actual frame rate of the output signal is 1/1.001 of the
value shown in the table. Some frame may be deleted
when converting the frame rate.
2)Simplified playback after 2-3 pulldown. Some frame
may be deleted when converting the frame rate.
3)Simplified playback after repeating each frame of
23.98P two or three times. Some frame may be deleted
when converting the frame rate.
4)50i provided through conversion from 50P
5)50P provided by outputting each frame of 25P two
times
6)25PsF provided through conversion from 25P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitations of Outputs
The outputs from the camcorder are limited by the menu settings as follows:
In Camera mode and durint playback in Media mode
blank: no signal
Menu setting
Output
HD/SD Video
i.LINK I/O Output
Select
SDI OUT HDMI
OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
A/V OUT i.LINK
Mode
Format
HD
HQ
Disable
HD SDI/
HD
HD
Component
SD SDI/
SD
SD
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
HD
SD P
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
Composite
HD SDI/
Component
SD
SP
HD
SD
HD
SD
SD SDI/
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
HD
SD P
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
Composite
SD SDI/
Component
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
Composite
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
Menu setting
Output
HD/SD Video
i.LINK I/O Output
Select
SDI OUT HDMI
OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
A/V OUT i.LINK
Mode
Format
HD
HQ
HDV
HD SDI/
HD
Component
SD SDI/
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
HD
SD P
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
Composite
HD SDI/
SD
1)
DV
DVCAM
Component
SD SDI/
SD
DV
Component
HD HDMI
DV
DV
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
DV
Composite
SD
DV
SP
HDV
HD SDI/
Component
SD SDI/
HD
SD
HDV
HDV
Component
HD HDMI
HD
HDV
HDV
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD P
SD i
HDV
Composite
SD
HDV
DV
DVCAM
HD SDI/
Component
SD SDI/
SD
DV
Component
HD HDMI
DV
DV
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
SD i
DV
Composite
SD
SD
DV
DV
SD
SD
DVCAM
SD SDI/
SD
Component
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
DV
DV
DV
SD i
Composite
1)No DVCAM stream is output with HQ 1920/24P and
HQ 1280/24P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With an i.LINK input in Media mode
• DV and HDV inputs can be displayed on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen even if the recording
operation and/or output are limited.
• If i.LINK input is refused, the screen becomes
blue.
• When “i.LINK I/O” is set to “Disabled,”
i.LINK input is refused.
blank: no signal
Menu setting
Input
Output
HD/SD Video
i.LINK I/O Output
Select
i.LINK
Refused
Refused
SDI OUT HDMI
OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
A/V OUT
Mode
Format
HD
HQ
HDV
HD SDI/
HD
Component
SD SDI/
SD
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
Refused
Refused
Refused
Composite
HD SDI/
Component
SD SDI/
Refused
SD
SD
SD
SD
DVCAM
DV
DV
SD
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
DV
DV
DV
Composite
HD SDI/
Component
SD SDI/
DV
SP
HDV
HDV
HD
SD
HDV
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
HDV
HDV
HDV
Composite
HD SDI/
Component
SD SDI/
HDV
DV
DVCAM
DV
SD
Component
HD HDMI
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
DV
DV
DV
DV
Composite
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Menu setting
Input
Output
HD/SD Video
i.LINK I/O Output
Select
i.LINK
SDI OUT HDMI
OUT
COMPONENT
OUT
A/V OUT
Mode
Format
SD
SD
DVCAM
SD SDI/
Component
DV
DV
DV
DV
SD
SD HDMI
Progressive
SD HDMI
Interlace
Composite
SD
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
VORSICHT
Backup Battery
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung falscher
Batterien. Batterien nur durch den vom Hersteller
empfohlenen oder einen gleichwertigen Typ
ersetzen.
This camcorder uses a backup battery to retain
various setting data.
Wenn Sie die Batterie entsorgen, müssen Sie die
Gesetze der jeweiligen Region und des jeweiligen
Landes befolgen.
A lithium battery (CR2032) for backup is
mounted in the camcorder at the factory.
The backup battery retains the date, time, and
timecode in Free Run mode even when no
operating power is being supplied.
Replacing the backup battery
Notes
• Be sure to set the power switch to OFF when
replacing the backup battery.
Service life of the backup battery
• Be careful not to drop the removed screw into
the camcorder.
When the backup battery’s voltage falls, the
backup battery low-voltage warning appears on
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
If this warning appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible.
1
2
3
Open the cover of the backup battery
holder on the bottom by loosening the
screw, and remove the battery.
WARNING
• Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not
recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in fire.
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
CR2025
3V
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
Insert a new backup battery (CR2032)
with the + symbol on the battery facing
outside.
AVERTISSEMENT
N’exposez pas les batteries à une chaleur
excessive, au soleil ou près d’un feu par exemple.
CR2025
3V
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement
avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Lorsque vous mettez la batterie au rebut, vous
devez respecter la législation en vigueur dans le
pays ou la région où vous vous trouvez.
Attach the cover in the original position.
CR2025
3V
WARNUNG
Akkus dürfen keinesfalls übermäßiger
Wärmeeinwirkung ausgesetzt werden, wie z.B.
Sonneneinstrahlung, Feuer o. ä.
Backup Battery
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Operating Power
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The camcorder does not No battery pack is mounted and no Mount a battery pack (page 26) or connect an AC
power on when you set
power is supplied to the DC IN
the power switch either to connector.
CAMERA or MEDIA.
The battery pack is completely
exhausted.
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
The power supply cuts
The battery pack becomes exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
while operating.
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is very low. This owes to the battery characteristics and is not a
exhausted very quickly.
defect.
The battery pack is inadequately
charged.
If the battery pack is soon exhausted even after you
charged it fully, it may comes to the end of its life.
Replace it with a new one.
Recording/Playback
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
Recording does not start The power switch is set to OFF or
Set the power switch to CAMERA.
when you press the REC MEDIA.
START/STOP button.
The SxS memory card is write-
protected.
card with a non-protected SxS memory card.
The SxS memory card is full.
Replace the card with one having sufficient space.
The SxS memory card needs
restoration.
Playback does not start
The power switch is set to OFF or
Set the power switch to MEDIA.
when you press the PLAY CAMERA.
button.
The supplied IR Remote Remote control operation is disabled. Enable remote control operation (page 33).
Commander does not
work.
The battery of the IR Remote
Commander is exhausted.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Audio recording is not
The AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
possible.
The recorded sound is
distorted.
The audio level is too high.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
again.
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low.
high noise level.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
again.
Troubleshooting
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Devices
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The equipment connected It sometimes takes time for the
to the camcorder via an connected equipment to recognize
Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected
equipment still does not react, do the following:
i.LINK connection does the operation.
not react as expected, for
example, no picture
•
Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by re-
plugging it.
• Turn the power off, and connect the cable again.
appears on its screen.
• Change the i.LINK cable.
Troubleshooting
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error/Warning Indications
The camcorder informs you of situations where
warning, caution, or an operation check is
required, through messages on the LCD monitor/
EVF screen, the tally lamps, and a buzzer.
The buzzer is output to the built-in speaker or to
the headphones connected via the headphone
connector. The buzzer volume can be adjusted
with “Alarm Level” in “Audio Output” of the
AUDIO SET menu.
Error Indications
The camcorder stops operation after the following indications.
Error indication on Buzzer
LCD/EVF
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
E + Error code
Continuous Rapidly
The camcorder may be defective.
flashing
Turn off the power and consult Sony service personnel.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the power switch to
OFF, remove both the battery pack and the DC IN source.)
Warning Indications
When one of the following indications is generated, follow the message to clear the problem.
Warning indication Buzzer
on LCD/EVF
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
Media Near Full
Intermittent Flashing
Free space on the SxS memory card has become insufficient.
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
No space is left on the SxS memory card. Recording, clip
copying and clip division cannot be performed.
Replace it with another.
Media Full
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
Battery Near End
Intermittent Flashing
The battery power will be exhausted soon.
Charge the battery pack at the earliest opportunity.
The battery pack is exhausted. Recording cannot be
performed.
Battery End
Continuous Rapidly
flashing
Connect a power source via the DC IN connector or stop
operation to charge the battery pack.
The internal temperature has risen above a safe operation
limit.
Temperature High
Intermittent Flashing
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait until the
temperature falls.
Voltage Low
Intermittent Flashing
The DC IN voltage has become low (stage 1).
Check the power supply.
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous Rapidly
The DC IN voltage is too low (stage 2). Recording cannot be
performed.
flashing
Connect other power source.
Battery Error
An error was detected with the battery pack.
Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
The remaining power of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Please Change Battery.
Backup Battery End
Please Change.
Error/Warning Indications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Warning indication Buzzer
on LCD/EVF
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
1)
A partitioned memory card or one that contains recorded clips
exceeding the number permitted with this camcorder is loaded.
This card cannot be used with this camcorder. Remove it and
load a compatible card.
Unknown Media(A)
Please Change.
Media Error
An error occurred with the memory card. The card requires
restoration.
1)
Media(A) Needs to be
Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Restored
Reached Clip Number
Limit
Cannot Record on
The maximum number of clips for a single memory card is
reached. No more clip can be recorded on the card.
Replace it with another card.
1)
Media(A)
Media Error
Cannot Record to
Recording cannot be done, as the memory card is defective.
As playback may be possible, it is recommended to replace it
with another card after copying the clips, as required.
1)
Media(A)
Media Error
Neither recording nor playback can be done, as the memory
card is defective.
1)
Cannot Use Media(A)
It cannot be operated with this camcorder. Replace it with
another card.
1)
A card of a different file system was inserted.
It cannot be used with this camcorder. Replace it with another
card.
Cannot Use Media(A)
Unsupported File System
Video Format Mismatch
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the Video Format setting is different from the
signal format of the external input signal.
Change “Video Format” of the OTHERS menu to match it to
that of the external signal.
Copy Protected Input
Cannot Record
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the stream is copy-protected.
Check the input signal.
DVCAM Input
Cannot Record
Media Error
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as it is a DV stream.
An error occurred in reading data from the memory card, and
playback cannot be continued.
Playback Halted
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card after
copying the clips, as required.
1)
Recording cannot be done, as an error occurred with the
memory card.
Media(A) Error
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card.
The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted
soon.
2)
Intermittent Flashing
HDD A Battery Near
End
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
The battery of the connected HDD is exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
2)
Continuous Rapidly
HDD A Battery End
flashing
Stop operation to change the battery.
Not Enough Capacity
There is not enough capacity for copying.
1)
Replace the card with another one.
Change Media (A)
Reached Duplication
Limit
The card have already ten clips having the same name as that
you tried to duplicate.
1)
Replace the card with another one.
Change Media (A)
Error/Warning Indications
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning indication Buzzer
on LCD/EVF
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
Not Enough Capacity
Cannot Divide
There is not enough capacity for dividing a clip.
Media Reached
Rewriting Limit
The memory card comes to the end of its service life. Make a
backup copy and replace the card with another one as soon as
possible. Recording/playback may not be performed properly
if you continue to use the card.
1)
Change Media (A)
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the memory
card.
1)(B) for the card in slot B
2)B for a HDD connected to slot B
Error/Warning Indications
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPEG-2 Video Patent
Portfolio License
Specifications
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
General
Power requirements
DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17.0 V)
Power consumption
Approx. 12.5 W (Typical) (Recording,
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
EVF On, LCD monitor Off)
Max. 14 W (Typical) (Recording, EVF
On, LCD monitor On)
Peak inrush current
(1) Power ON, current probe method:
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
15 A (240V)
(2) Hot switching inrush current,
measured in accordance with
European standard EN55103-1:
62 A (230V)
Operating temperature
0ºC to +40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)
Storage temperature
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF)
Recording/playback formats
Video
HD HQ Mode: MPEG-2 MP@HL,
35 Mbps / VBR
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1440 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
HD SP Mode: MPEG-2 MP@H-14,
25 Mbps /CBR
1440 × 1080 /59.94i, 50i (23.98P is
converted to 59.94i in 2-3 pull-
down processing.)
SD Mode: DVCAM
720× 480/59.94i, 29.97P
720× 576/50i, 25P
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License / Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Audio
Focus
LPCM (16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels)
Auto/Manual selectable
Ranges:
Recording/playback time
800 mm to ∞ (Macro OFF)
50 mm to ∞ (Macro ON, Wide)
735 mm to ∞ (Macro ON, Tele)
With one SBP-8
SP mode: Approx. 35 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 25 min.
With one SBP-16
Picture stabilizing function
SteadyShot ON/OFF possible, shift-lens
system
SP mode: Approx. 70 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 50 min.
With one SBP-32 or SBS-32G1
SP mode: Approx.140 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 100 min.
Filter thread
M77 mm, pitch 0.75 mm
Macro
Continuous operation time
ON/OFF switchable
(Recording, EVF On, LCD monitor Off)
With the BP-U60
Camera
Approx. 4 hours
With the BP-U30
Pickup device
1
Approx. 2 hours
/ -inch type, CMOS image sensor
2
Effective picture elements:
Mass
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Camcorder: 2.4 kg (5 lb 4.7 oz)
With the supplied lens hood, eyecup,
BP-U30 battery pack and one SxS
memory card: 2.8 kg (6 lb 2.8 oz)
Format
3-chip RGB
Optical system
F1.6 prism system
Dimensions
Built-in filters
ND filters
Supplied accessories
OFF: Clear
1
1: / ND
8
1
2: / ND
64
Camera Block
Sensitivity
F10 (Typical) (With 1920/60i, 89.9%
Lens
reflection, 2000 lx)
Focal length
Minimum illumination
5.8 mm to 81.2 mm (equivalent to
0.14 lx (F1.9, +18 dB, 64-frame
31.4 mm to 439 mm on 35 mm lens)
accumulation)
Zoom
Video S/N
54 dB (Y) (Typical)
Servo/Manual selectable
Zoom ratio
Horizontal resolution
14×
1000TV lines or more (with HQ 1920,
HD SDI output)
Maximum relative aperture
1:1.9
Gain
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, AGC
Iris
Auto/Manual selectable
F1.9 to F16 and C (close)
Shutter speed
1
1
/
to
/
sec.
32
2000
Specifications
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slow shutter
2 to 8 frames
EX Slow Shutter: 16, 32, 64 frames
Writing rate
50 Mbps or more
Reading rate
50 Mbps or more
Audio Block
Inputs/Outputs
Input connectors
Built-in microphones
Stereo electret condenser microphones
Directivity: Omnidirectional
Frequency response: 50 Hz to 15 kHz
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
XLR 3-pin (2), female
LINE: +4 dBu
Built-in speaker
Monaural
Output: 250 mW
MIC: –20 dBu to –65 dBu (3-dB steps)
(Reference level: 0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)
Displays
DC IN connector
DC jack (1)
LCD monitor
Output connectors
Screen size
A/V OUT connector
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)
AV multiconnector (1)
Aspect ratio
Audio: –10 dBu (47kΩ load, reference
level)
16:9
Analog composite: NTSC or PAL
Picture size
640 (H) × 3 (RGB) × 480 (V) delta
sequence
COMPONENT OUT connector
Mini D connector (1)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω
Pb / Pr: 0.7 Vp-p, 75Ω
Transmission
Hybrid (semi-transmissive) type
Headphone connector
Viewfinder
Stereo mini jack (1), –18 dBu (reference
level output, 16Ω load)
Screen size
1.148 cm diagonal (0.452-inch)
SDI OUT connector
BNC type (1), conforming to
Aspect ratio
SMPTE292M/259M standards
16:9
HDMI OUT connector
Picture elements
Type A (1)
852 (H) × 480 (V)
Computer connectors
Media Block
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector
Card slots
i.LINK, IEEE1394, 4-pin connector (1),
Type: Express Card34
S400
Number of slots: 2
USB connector
Connector: Conforming to PCMCIA
Express Card
mini-B/USB2.0 Hi-Speed (1)
Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
Media adaptor (for “Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
HX” series)
Optional Accessories
MEAD-MS01
Battery pack
BP-U30, BP-U60
Battery charger
BC-U1, BC-U2
SxS memory card
SxS PRO SBP-8 (8 GB)
SxS PRO SBP-16 (16 GB)
SxS PRO SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS-1 SBS-32G1 (32 GB)
SxS memory card USB reader/writer
SBAC-US10
Electret condenser microphone
ECM-673, ECM-680S
Wireless microphone
UWP-V1
Wide conversion lens
VCL-EX0877
Professional hard disk unit
PHU-60K, PHU-120K, PHU-120R
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Mobile storage unit
PXU-MS240
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inches)
R
OFF
MENU
CANCEL CAMERA
MEDIA
DC IN
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM
S&Q
S&Q
AF/MF
Full MF
SLOT SELECT
A
B
ASSIGN
REC EXPANDED
REVIEW FOCUS
1
2
3
SEL/SET
IRIS
PICTURE
PROFILE
ND
FILTER
AUTO
MANUAL
INTMIC
EXT
CH-1
CH-1
CH-1
MANU AUTO
MACRO
OPEN
2
1
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
LEVEL
START/
STOP
A
UDIO
LEVEL
AUTO
INTMIC
EXT
ZEBRA PEAKING FULL AUTO
CH-2
CH-2
CH-2
MANUAL
PMW-EX1R
OFF ON
FOCUS
RELEASE
CLOSE
OPEN
OFF
C
A
C
H
E
R
E
C
GAIN
WHITE BAL
CACHE REC
L
M
H
B
A
PRST
MANU AUTO
PUSH AF
1
1
(
)
(
)
308 12 /4
179 7 /8
1
(
)
384 15 /8
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it • Always verify that the unit is operating properly
was recorded successfully.
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT
OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING
THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER
EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR
FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.
Specifications
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printed in Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Singer Grinder 6184 01 User Manual
Sony Battery Charger BC TR1 User Manual
Sony Digital Photo Frame DPF A73 E73 User Manual
Sony DVD Player DVPSR510H User Manual
Sony Flat Panel Television XBR 65X900A 55X900A User Manual
Sony Home Theater System BDV F7 User Manual
SoundCraft Home Theater Server Rac Pac User Manual
Stanton CD Player C503 User Manual
Sun Microsystems Server V490 User Manual
Superior Cell Phone K310I User Manual